UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 
 
 FRO\\ THH LIBRARY Ol 
 
 BENJAMIN PARKE AVERY. 
 
 GIFT OF MRS. AVERY, 
 
 August, 1806. 
 
 s No. 
 
 i /- 
 
 fj iw A-^u . V 
 

LIGHT AND ELECTRICITY: 
 
 l^OTES 
 
 OF 
 
 TWO COURSES OF LECTURES BEFORE THE ROYAL 
 INSTITUTION OF GREAT BRITAIN. 
 
 BY 
 
 JOHN TYNDALL, LL. D., F. E. S., 
 
 AUTHOB OP "HEAT AS A MODE OF MOTION," "LECTURES ON SOUND," "FRAGMENTS OF 
 
 SCIENCE FOB UNSCIENTIFIC PEOPLE, 11 " HOURS OF EXEECISE IN- THE ALPS," 
 
 ETC., ETC.; PROFESSOR OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY IN THE 
 
 EOYAL INSTITUTION OF GREAT BRITAIN. 
 
 NEW YOEK: 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, 
 
 549 & 551 BROADWAY. 
 1871. 
 

 PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION. 
 
 FOE the benefit of those who attended his lectures on 
 Light and Electricity at the Royal Institution, Prof. 
 Tyndall prepared with much care a series of Notes, sum- 
 ming up briefly and clearly the leading facts and princi- 
 ples of these sciences. The Notes proved so serviceable 
 to those for whom they were designed, that they were 
 widely sought by students and teachers, and Prof. 
 Tyndall accordingly had them reprinted in two small 
 books. Under the conviction that they will be equally 
 appreciated by instructors and .learners in this country, 
 they are here combined and republished in a single 
 volume. 
 
 No intelligent teacher or earnest student needs to be 
 reminded of the importance of repetition and recapitula- 
 tion to give permanence to mental impressions. But it is 
 neither possible nor desirable to retain in the memory 
 the copious details which may be necessary to the first 
 comprehension of a subject. Hence, after listening to 
 a course of lectures, or going through an extended work 
 in which facts, experimental proofs, and speculations, have 
 
4 PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION. 
 
 been elaborately presented, it is invaluable to retravcrsc 
 the field, concentrating attention upon the prominent 
 and established principles of the subject. This is an in- 
 dispensable condition of all solid acquisition ; and, in thus 
 clearly and sharply stating the fundamental principles of 
 Electrical and Optical Science, Prof. Tyndall has earned 
 the cordial thanks of all interested in education. 
 
 NEW YORK, April, 1871. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 LIGHT. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 General Considerations. Eectilinear Propagation of Light . . 11 
 
 Formation of Images through Small Apertures . . . 12 
 
 Shadows . . . . . . .13 
 
 Enfeeblement of Light by Distance : Law of Inverse Squares . 15 
 
 Photometry, or the Measurement of Light . . . .16 
 
 Brightness . . . . . . .17 
 
 Light requires Tune to pass through Space . . . .19 
 
 Aberration of Light . . . . .20 
 
 Reflection of Light (Catoptrics) Plane Mirrors . . .22 
 
 Verification of the Law of Reflection . . . . 22 
 
 Reflection from Curved Surfaces : Concave Mirrors . . .27 
 
 Caustics by Reflection (Catacaustics) . . . . 31 
 
 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . .32 
 
 Refraction of Light (Dioptrics) . . 33 
 
 Opacity of Transparent Mixtures . . . . .39 
 
 Total Reflection . . . . . . .41 
 
 Lenses . . . . . . . .44 
 
 Converging Lenses . . . . . .44 
 
 Diverging Lenses . . . . . . .44 
 
 Vision and the Eye . . . . . .46 
 
 Adjustment of the Eye : Use of Spectacles . . . .48 
 
 The Punctum Co3cmn 50 
 
6 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Persistence of Impressions . . . . . .61 
 
 Bodies seen within the Eye . . . . . 52 
 
 The Stereoscope . . . . . . .64 
 
 Nature of Light ; Physical Theory of Reflection and Refraction 57 
 Theory of Emission . . . . . .57 
 
 s Theory of Undulation . . . . . .59 
 
 Prisms ........ 64 
 
 Prismatic Analysis of Light : Dispersion . . . .65 
 
 Invisible Rays : Calorescence and Fluorescence . . . 66 
 
 Doctrine of Visual Periods . . . . . .68 
 
 Doctrine of Colors ...... 69 
 
 Chromatic Aberration. Achromatism . . . .71 
 
 Subjective Colors ....... 72 
 
 Spectrum Analysis . . . . . . .74 
 
 Further Definition of Radiation and Absorption ... 75 
 
 The pure Spectrum : Fraunhofer's Lines . . . .77 
 
 Reciprocity of Radiation and Absorption . . . 78 
 
 Solar Chemistry . . . . . . .80 
 
 Planetary Chemistry . . . . . .81 
 
 Stellar Chemistry . . . . . . .82 
 
 Nebular Chemistry ...... 82 
 
 The Red Prominences and Envelope of the Sun . . .82 
 
 The Rainbow ....... 84 
 
 Interference of Light . . . . . . .86 
 
 Diffraction, or the Inflection of Light . . . . 88 
 
 Measurement of the Waves of Light . . . . .93 
 
 Colors of Thin Plates . . . . . .96 
 
 Double Refraction . . . . . . .101 
 
 Phenomena presented by Iceland Spar . . . ' . 104 
 
 Polarization of Light . . . . . .106 
 
 Polarization of Light by Reflection .... 108 
 
 Polarization of Light by Refraction . . . . .110 
 
 Polarization of Light by Double Refraction . . .110 
 
CONTENTS. 7 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Examination of Light transmitted through Iceland Spar . .111 
 
 Colors of Double-refracting Crystals in Polarized Light . . 114 
 
 Rings surrounding the Axes of Crystals in Polarized Light . ,119 
 
 Elliptic and Circular Polarization . . . .120 
 
 Rotatory Polarization . . . . . .121 
 
 CONCLUSION 123 
 
 ELECTRICITY. 
 
 Voltaic Electricity : the Voltaic Battery . . . 131 
 
 Electro-Magnetism : Elementary Phenomena . . .133 
 
 Electro-Magnetic Engines . . . . . 135 
 
 Physical Effects of Magnetization . . . . .136 
 
 Character of Magnetic Force . . . . .138 
 
 Magnetism of Helix : Strength of Electro-Magnets . . .140 
 
 Electro-Magnetic Attractions : Law of Squares . . . 140 
 
 Inference from Law of Squares ; Theoretic Notions . . . 143 
 
 Diamagnetism : Magne-Crystallic Action . . . 144 
 
 Frictional Electricity: Attraction and Repulsion: Conduction and 
 
 Insulation ....... 145 
 
 Theories of Electricity : Electric Fluids .';"-. . . 147 
 
 Electric Induction : the Condenser : the Electrophorus . . 148 
 
 The Electric Machine : the Leyden-jar .... 149 
 
 The Electric Current . . . . . . .150 
 
 The Electric Discharge : Thunder and Lightning . . 151 
 
 Electric Density : Action of Points ..... 152 
 
 Relation of Voltaic to Frictional Electricity . . . 153 
 
 Historic Jottings, concerning Conduction and the Leyden-jar . 155 
 
 Historic Jottings, concerning the Electric Telegraph . . 156 
 
 Phenomena observed in Telegraph-Cables .... 159 
 
 Artificial Cables ....... 163 
 
 Sketch of Ohm's Theory and Kohlrausch's Verification . .165 
 
8 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Electro-chemistry. Chemical Actions in the Voltaic Cell : Origin of 
 
 the Current ...... 168 
 
 Chemical Actions at a Distance : Electrolysis . . . .170 
 
 Measures of the Electric Current . . . .174 
 
 Electric Polarization : Ritter's Secondary Pile . . .175 
 
 Faraday's Electrolytic Law . . . . .177 
 
 Nobili's Iris Rings . . . . . .178 
 
 Distribution of Heat in the Circuit . . . .179 
 
 Relation of Heat to Current and to Resistance . . .180 
 
 Magneto-Electricity : Induced Currents . . . . 181 
 
 Relation of Induced Currents to the Lines of Magnetic Force. Rota- 
 tory Magnetism . . . . . .184 
 
 The Extra-Current . . . . .186 
 
 Influence of Time on Intensity of Discharge. The Condenser . 187 
 Electric Discharge through rarefied Gases and Vapors . . 188 
 
 Action of Magnets on the Luminous Discharge . . .190 
 
 Magneto-electric Machines. Saxton's Machine. Siemens's Armature 191 
 Wilde's Machine . . . . . . .192 
 
 Siemens's and Wheatstone's Machine . . . .193 
 
 Induced Currents of the Leyden-Battery . . . . 1 94 
 
NOTES 
 
 OF A COURSE OF NINE LECTURES ON 
 
 LIGHT. 
 
UHI7ERSIT7 
 
 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 General Considerations. Rectilinear Propagation of 
 Light. 
 
 1. THE ancients supposed light to be produced and 
 vision excited by something emitted from the eye. The 
 moderns hold vision to be excited by something that 
 strikes the eye from without. What that something is 
 we shall consider more closely subsequently. 
 
 2. Luminous bodies are independent sources of light. 
 They generate it and emit it, and do not receive their 
 light from other bodies. The sun, a star, a candle-flame, 
 are examples. 
 
 3. Illuminated bodies are such as receive the light by 
 which they are seen from luminous bodies. A house, a 
 tree, a man, are examples. Such bodies scatter in all 
 directions the light which they receive ; this light reaches 
 the eye, and through its action the illuminated bodies are 
 rendered visible. 
 
 4. All illuminated bodies scatter or reflect light, and 
 they are distinguished from each other by the excess or 
 defect of light which they send to the eye. A white cloud 
 in a dark-blue firmament is distinguished by its excess of 
 light ; a dark pine-tree projected against the same cloud is 
 distinguished through its defect of light. 
 
 5. Look at any point of a visible object. The light 
 comes from that point in straight lines to the eye. The 
 
12 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 lines of light, or rays as they are called, that reach the 
 pupil form a cone, with the pupil for a base, and with the 
 point for an apex. The point is always seen at the place 
 where the rays which form the surface of this cone inter- 
 sect each other, or, as we shall learn immediately, where 
 they seem to intersect each other. 
 
 6. Light, it has just been said, moves in straight lines ; 
 you see a luminous object by means of the rays which it 
 sends to the eye, but you cannot see round a corner. A 
 small obstacle that intercepts the view of a visible point 
 is always in the straight line between the eye and the 
 point. In a dark room let a small hole be made in a win- 
 dow-shutter, and let the sun shine through the hole. A 
 narrow luminous beam will mark its course on the dust 
 of the room, and the track of the beam will be perfectly 
 straight. 
 
 7. Imagine the aperture to diminish in size until the 
 beam passing through it and marking itself upon the dust 
 of the room shall dwindle to a mere line in thickness. In 
 this condition the beam is what we call a ray of light. 
 
 Formation of Images through Small Apertures. 
 
 8. Instead of permitting the direct sunlight to enter 
 the room by the small aperture, let the light from some 
 body illuminated by the sun a tree, a house, a man, for 
 example be permitted to enter. Let this light be re- 
 ceived upon a white screen placed in the dark room. 
 Every visible point of the object sends a straight ray of 
 light through the aperture. The ray carries with it the 
 color of the point from which it issues, and imprints the 
 color upon the screen. The sum total of the rays falling 
 thus upon the screen produces an inverted image of that 
 object. The image is inverted because the rays cross each 
 other at the aperture. 
 
SHADOWS. 13 
 
 9. Experimental Illustration. Place a lighted candle 
 in a small camera with a small orifice in one of its sides, 
 or a large one covered by tin-foil. Prick the tin-foil with 
 a needle ; the inverted image of the flame will immediate- 
 ly appear upon a screen placed to receive it. By ap- 
 proaching the camera to the screen, or the screen to the 
 camera, the size of the image is diminished ; by augment- 
 ing the distance between them, the size of the image is 
 increased. 
 
 10. The boundary of the image is formed by drawing 
 from every point of the outline of the object straight lines 
 through the aperture, and producing these lines until they 
 cut the screen. This could not be the case if the straight 
 lines and the light rays were not coincident. 
 
 11. Some bodies have the power of permitting light to 
 pass freely through them; they are transparent bodies. 
 Others have the power of rapidly quenching the light that 
 enters them ; they are opaque bodies. There is no such 
 thing as perfect transparency or perfect opacity. The 
 purest glass and crystal quench some rays; the most 
 opaque metal, if thin enough, permits some rays to pass 
 through it. The redness of the London sun in smoky 
 weather is due to the partial transparency of soot for the 
 red light. Pure water at great depths is blue; it quenches 
 more or less the red rays. Ice when seen in large masses 
 in the glaciers of the Alps is blue also. 
 
 Shadows. 
 
 12. As a consequence of the rectilinear motion of light, 
 opaque bodies cast shadows. If the source of light be a 
 point, the shadow is sharply defined; if the source be 
 a luminous surface, the perfect shadow is fringed by aft 
 imperfect shadow called a penumbra. 
 
 13. When light emanates from a point, the shadow of 
 
14 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 a sphere placed in the light is a divergent cone sharply 
 defined. 
 
 14. When light emanates from a luminous globe, the 
 perfect shadow of a sphere equal to the globe in size will 
 be a cylinder it will be bordered by a penumbra. 
 
 15. If the luminous sphere l>e the larger of the two, 
 the perfect shadow will be a convergent cone / it will be 
 surrounded by a penumbra. This is the character of the 
 shadows cast by the earth and moon in space ; for the sun 
 is a sphere larger than either the earth or the moon. 
 
 16. To an eye placed in the true conical shadow of the 
 moon, the sun is totally eclipsed ; to an eye in the penum- 
 bra, the sun appears horned ; while to an eye placed be- 
 yond the apex of the conical shadow and within the space 
 enclosed by the surface of the cone produced, the eclipse 
 is annular. All these eclipses are actually seen from time 
 to time from the earth's surface. 
 
 17. The influence of magnitude may be experimentally 
 illustrated by means of a bat's-wing or fish-tail flame ; or 
 by a flat oil or paraffine flame. Holding an opaque rod 
 between the flame and a white screen, the shadow is sharp 
 when the edge of the flame is turned toward the rod. 
 When the broad surface of the flame is pointed to the 
 rod, the real shadow is fringed by a penumbra. 
 
 18. As the distance from the screen increases, the 
 penumbra encroaches more and more upon the perfect 
 shadow, and finally obliterates it. 
 
 19. It is the angular magnitude of the sun that de- 
 stroys the sharpness of solar shadows. In sunlight, for 
 example, the shadow of a hair is sensibly washed away at 
 a few inches distance from the surface on which it falls. 
 The electric light, on the contrary, emanating as it does 
 from small carbon points, casts a defined shadow of a hair 
 upon a screen many feet distant. 
 

 
 ENFEEBLEMENT OF LIGHT BY DISTANCE. 15 
 
 Enfeeblement of Light Tyy Distance / Law of Inverse 
 Squares. 
 
 20. Light diminishes in intensity as we recede from 
 the source of light. If the luminous source be a point, 
 the intensity diminishes as the square of the distance in- 
 creases. Calling the quantity of light falling upon a given 
 surface at the distance of a foot or a yard 1, the quantity 
 falling on it at a distance of 2 feet or 2 yards is |-, at a 
 distance of 3 feet or 3 yards it is {-, at a distance of 10 feet 
 or 10 yards it would be yj^, and so on. This is the mean- 
 ing of the law of inverse squares as applied to light. 
 
 21. Experimental Illustrations. Place your source of 
 light, which may be a candle-flame though the law is in 
 strictness true only for points at a distance say of 9 feet 
 from a white screen. Hold a square of pasteboard, or 
 some other suitable material, at a distance of 2 feet from 
 the flame, or th of the distance of the screen. The square 
 casts a shadow upon the screen. 
 
 22. Assure yourself that the area of this shadow is 
 sixteen times that of the square which casts it ; a student 
 of Euclid will see in a moment that this must be the case, 
 and those who are not geometers can readily satisfy them- 
 selves by actual measurement. Dividing, for example, 
 each side of a square sheet of paper into four equal parts, 
 and folding the sheet at the opposite points of division, a 
 small square is obtained y^-th of the area of the large one. 
 Let this small square, or one equal to it, be your shadow- 
 casting body. Held at 2J feet from the flame, its shadow 
 upon the screen 9 feet distant will be exactly covered by 
 the entire sheet of paper. "Wlien, therefore, the small 
 square is removed, the light that fell upon it is diffused 
 over sixteen times the area on the screen; it is therefore 
 diluted to y^th of its former intensity. That is to say, by 
 
16 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 augmenting the distance fourfold we diminish tLe light 
 sixteenfold. 
 
 23. Make the same experiment by placing a square at 
 a distance of 3 feet from the source of light and 6 from 
 the screen. The shadow now cast by the square will have 
 nine times the area of the square itself ; hence the light 
 falling on the square is diffused over nine times the surface 
 upon the screen. It is, therefore, reduced to ^th of its 
 intensity. That is to say, by trebling the distance from 
 the source of light we diminish the light ninefold. 
 
 24. Make the same experiment at a distance of 4J fcet 
 from the source. The shadow here will be four times the 
 area of the shadow-casting square, and the light diffused 
 over the greater square will be reduced to Jth of its 
 former intensity. Thus, by doubling the distance from 
 the source of light we reduce the intensity of the light 
 fourfold. 
 
 25. Instead of beginning with a distance of 2 feet 
 from the source, we might have begun with a distance of 
 1 foot. The area of the shadow in this case would be 
 eighty-one times that of the square which casts it ; prov- 
 ing that at 9 feet distance the intensity of the light is -^ 
 of what it is at 1 foot distance. 
 
 26. Thus when the distances are 
 
 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, V, 8, 9, etc., 
 the relative intensities are 
 
 1> i, l> Ty A> &, t A> -fa, -fa, e tc. 
 This is the numerical expression of the law of inverse 
 squares. 
 
 Photometry, or the Measurement of Light. 
 
 27. The law just established enables us to compare 
 one light with another, and to express by numbers their 
 relative illuminating powers. 
 
BRIGHTNESS. 17 
 
 28. The more intense a light, the darker is the shadow 
 which it casts ; in other words, the greater is the contrast 
 between the illuminated and unilluminated surface. 
 
 29. Place an upright rod in front of a white screen and 
 a candle-flame at some distance behind the rod, the rod 
 casts a shadow upon the screen. 
 
 30. Place a second flame by the side of the first, a 
 second shadow is cast, and it is easy to arrange matters 
 so that the shadows shall be close to each other, thus 
 offering themselves for easy comparison to the eye. If 
 when the lights are at the same distance from the screen 
 the two shadows are equally dark, then the two lights 
 have the same illuminating power. 
 
 31. But if one of the shadows be darker than the other, 
 it is because its corresponding light is brighter than the 
 other. Remove the brighter light farther from the screen, 
 the shadows gradually approximate in depth, and at length 
 the eye can perceive no difference between them. The 
 shadow corresponding to each light is now illuminated 
 by the other light, and if the shadows are equal it is be- 
 cause the quantities of light cast by both upon the screen 
 are equal. 
 
 32. Measure the distances of the two lights from the 
 screen, and square these distances. The two squares will 
 express the relative illuminating powers of the two lights. 
 Supposing one distance to be 3 feet and the other 5, the 
 relative illuminating powers are as 9 to 25- 
 
 Brightness. 
 
 33. But if light diminishes so rapidly with the distance 
 if, for example, the light of a candle at the distance of a 
 yard is 100 times more intense than at the distance of 10 
 yards how is it that on looking at lights in churches or 
 theatres, or in large rooms, or at our street-lamps, a light 
 
18 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 10 yards off appears almost, if not quite, as bright as one 
 close at hand ? 
 
 34. To answer this question I must anticipate matters 
 so far as to say that at the back of the eye is a screen, 
 woven of nerve-filaments, named the retina; and that 
 when we see a light distinctly, its image is formed upon 
 this screen. This point will be fully developed when we 
 come to treat of the eye. ISTow the sense of external 
 brightness depends upon the brightness of this internal 
 retinal image, and not upon its size. As we retreat from 
 a light, its image upon the retina becomes smaller, and it 
 is easy to prove that the diminution follows the law of 
 inverse squares ; that at a double distance the area of 
 the retinal image is reduced to one-fourth, at a treble dis- 
 tance to one-ninth, and so on. The concentration of light 
 accompanying this decrease of magnitude exactly atones 
 for the diminution due to distance ; hence, if the air be 
 clear, the light, within wide variations of distance, appears 
 equally bright to the observer. 
 
 35. If an eye could be placed behind the retina, the 
 augmentation or diminution of the image, with the de- 
 crease or increase of distance, might be actually observed. 
 An exceedingly simple apparatus enables us to illustrate 
 this point. Take a pasteboard or tin tube, three or four 
 inches wide and three or four inches long, and cover 
 one end of it with a sheet of tin-foil, and the other with 
 tracing-paper, or ordinary letter-paper wetted with oil 
 or turpentine. Prick the tin-foil with a needle, and 
 turn the aperture toward a candle-flame. An inverted 
 image of the flame will be seen on the translucent paper 
 screen by the eye behind it. As you approach the flame 
 the image becomes larger, as you recede from the flame the 
 image becomes smaller ; but the brightness remains through- 
 out the same. It is so with the image upon the retina. 
 
LIGHT REQUIRES TIME TO PASS THROUGH SPACE. 19 
 
 36. If a sunbeam be permitted to enter a room through 
 a small aperture, the spot of light formed on a distant 
 screen will be round, whatever be the shape of the aper- 
 ture ; this curious effect is due to the angular magnitude 
 of the sun. Were the sun a point, the light spot would be 
 accurately of the same shape as the aperture. Supposing, 
 then, the aperture to be square, every point of light round 
 the sun's periphery sends a small square to the screen. 
 These small squares are ranged round a circle correspond- 
 ing to the periphery of the sun ; through their blending 
 and overlapping they produce a rounded outline. The 
 spots of light which fall through the apertures of a tree's 
 foliage on the ground are rounded for the same reason. 
 
 Light requires Time to pass through Space. 
 
 37. This was proved in 1675 and 1676 by an eminent 
 Dane, named Olaf Koemer, who was then engaged with 
 Cassini in Paris in observing the eclipses of Jupiter's 
 moons. The planet, whose distance from the sun is 475,- 
 693,000 miles, has four satellites. We are now only con- 
 cerned with the one nearest to the planet. Rcemer watched 
 this moon, saw it move round in front of the planet, pass 
 to the other side of it, and then plunge into Jupiter's 
 shadow, behaving like a lamp suddenly extinguished : at 
 the other edge of the shadow he saw it reappear like a 
 lamp suddenly lighted. The moon thus acted the part of 
 a signal-light to the astronomer, which enabled him to 
 tell exactly its time of revolution. The period between 
 two successive lightings up of the lunar lamp gave this 
 time. It was found to be 42 hours, 28 minutes, and 35 
 seconds. 
 
 38. This observation was so accurate, that having de- 
 termined the moment when the moon emerged from the 
 shadow, the moment of its hundredth appearance could 
 
2Q NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 also be determined. In fact, it would be 100 times 42 
 hours, 28 minutes, 35 seconds, from the first observa- 
 tion. 
 
 39. Rcemer's first observation was made when the 
 earth was in the part of its orbit nearest Jupiter. About 
 six months afterward, when the little moon ought to make 
 its appearance for the hundredth time, it was found un- 
 punctual, being fully 15 minutes behind its calculated 
 time. Its appearance, moreover, had been growing grad- 
 ually later, as the earth retreated toward the part of its 
 orbit most distant from Jupiter. 
 
 40. Roemer reasoned thus: "Had I been able to re- 
 main at the other side of the earth's orbit, the moon might 
 have appeared always at the proper instant ; an observer 
 placed there would probably have seen the moon 15 
 minutes ago, the retardation in my case being due to 
 the fact that the light requires 15 minutes to travel from 
 the place where my first observation was made to my 
 present position." 
 
 41. This flash of genius was immediately succeeded by 
 another. " If this surmise be correct," Rremer reasoned, 
 " then as I approach Jupiter along the other side of the 
 earth's orbit, the retardation ought to become gradually 
 less, and when I reach the place of my first observation 
 there ought to be no retardation at all." He found this 
 to be the case, and thus proved not only that light re- 
 quired time to pass through space, but also determined 
 its rate of propagation. 
 
 42. The velocity of light as determined by Roemer is 
 192,500 miles in a second. 
 
 The Aberration of Light. 
 
 The astounding velocity assigned to light by the ob- 
 servations of Roamer received the most striking confirma- 
 
THE ABERRATION OF LIGHT. 21 
 
 tion from the English astronomer Bradley in the year 
 1723. In Kew Gardens to the present hour there is a 
 sundial to mark the spot where Bradley discovered the 
 aberration of light. 
 
 43. If we move quickly through a rain-shower which 
 falls vertically downward, the drops will no longer seem 
 to fall vertically, but will appear to meet us. A similar 
 deflection of the stellar rays by the motion of the earth in 
 its orbit is called the aberration of light. 
 
 44. Knowing the speed at which we move through a 
 vertical rain-shower, and knowing the angle at which the 
 rain-drops appear to descend, we can readily calculate the 
 velocity of the falling drops of rain. So, likewise, know- 
 ing the velocity of the earth in its orbit, and the deflec- 
 tion of the rays of light produced by the earth's motion, 
 we can immediately calculate the velocity of light. 
 
 45. The velocity of light, as determined by Bradley, is 
 191,515 miles per second a most striking agreement with 
 the result of Rcemer. 
 
 46. This velocity has also been determined by experi- 
 ments over terrestrial distances. M. Fizeau found it thus 
 to be 194,677 miles a second, while the later experiments 
 of M. Foucault made it 185,177 miles a second. 
 
 47. "A cannon-ball," says Sir John Herschel, "would 
 require seventeen years to reach the sun, yet light travels 
 over the same space in eight minutes. The swiftest bird, 
 at its utmost speed, would require nearly three weeks to 
 make the tour of the earth. Light performs the same dis- 
 tance in much less time than is necessary for a single 
 stroke of its wing ; yet its rapidity is but commensurate 
 with the distance it has to travel. It is demonstrable 
 that light cannot reach our system from the nearest of the 
 fixed stars in less than five years, and telescopes disclose 
 to us objects probably many times more remote." 
 
22 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 The Reflection of Light (Catoptrics) Plane Mirrors. 
 
 48. When light passes from one optical medium to an- 
 other, a portion of it is always turned back or reflected. 
 
 49. Light is regularly reflected by a polished surface ; 
 but if the surface be not polished, the light is irregularly 
 reflected or scattered. 
 
 50. Thus a piece of ordinary drawing-paper will scat- 
 ter a beam of light that falls upon it so as to illuminate a 
 room. A plane mirror receiving the sunbeam will reflect 
 it "in a definite direction, and illuminate intensely a small 
 portion of the room. 
 
 51. If the polish of the mirror were perfect it would 
 be invisible, we should simply see in it the images of other 
 objects ; if the room were without dust-particles, the 
 beam passing through the air would also be invisible. It 
 is the light scattered by the mirror and by the particles 
 suspended in the air which renders them visible. 
 
 52. A ray of light striking as a perpendicular against 
 a reflecting surface is reflected back along the perpen- 
 dicular ; it simply retraces its own course. If it strike 
 the surface obliquely, it is reflected obliquely. 
 
 53. Draw a perpendicular to the surface at the point 
 where the ray strikes it ; the angle enclosed between the 
 direct ray and this perpendicular is called the angle of in- 
 cidence. The angle enclosed by the reflected ray and the 
 perpendicular is called the angle of reflection. 
 
 54. It is a fundamental law of optics that the angle of 
 incidence is equal to the angle of reflection. 
 
 Verification of the Law of Reflection. 
 
 55. Fill a basin with water to the brim, the water be- 
 ing blackened by a little ink. Let a small -plummet 
 a small lead bullet, for example suspended by a thread, 
 
VERIFICATION OF THE LAW OF REFLECTION. 23 
 
 hang into the water. The water is to be our horizontal 
 mirror, and the plumb-line our perpendicular. Let the 
 plummet hang from the centre of a horizontal scale, with 
 inches marked upon it right and left from the point of 
 suspension, which is to be the zero of the scale. A lighted 
 candle is to be placed on one side of the plumb-line, the 
 observer's eye being at the other. 
 
 56. The question to be solved is this : How is the ray 
 which strikes the liquid surface at the foot of the plumb- 
 line reflected ? Moving the candle along the scale, so that 
 the tip of its flame shall stand opposite different numbers, 
 it is found that, to see the reflected tip of the flame in the 
 direction of the foot of the plumb-line, the line of vision 
 must cut the scale as far on the one side of that line as the 
 candle is on the other. In other words, the ray reflect- 
 ed from the foot of the perpendicular cuts the scale 
 accurately at the candle's distance on the other side 
 of the perpendicular. From this it immediately follows 
 that the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of reflec- 
 tion. 
 
 57. With an artificial horizon of this kind, and employ- 
 ing a theodolite to take the necessary angles, the law has 
 been established with the most rigid accuracy. The angle 
 of elevation to a star being taken by the instrument, the 
 telescope is then pointed downward to the image of the 
 star reflected from the artificial horizon. It is always 
 found that the direct and reflected rays enclose equal 
 angles with the horizontal axis of the telescope, the reflected 
 ray being as far below the horizontal axis as the direct ray 
 is above it. On account of the star's distance the ray 
 which strikes the reflecting surface is parallel with the ray 
 which reaches the telescope directly, and from this follows, 
 by a brief }mt rigid demonstration, the law above enun- 
 ciated. 
 
24 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 58. The path described by the direct and reflected rays 
 is the shortest possible. 
 
 59. When the reflecting surface is roughened, rays from 
 different points, more or less distant from each other, reach 
 the eye. Thus, a breeze crisping the surface of the Thames 
 or Serpentine sends to the eye, instead of single images 
 of the lamps upon their margin, pillars of light. Blowing 
 upon our basin of water, we also convert the reflected light 
 of our candle into a luminous column. 
 
 60. Light is reflected with different energy by different 
 substances. At a perpendicular incidence, only 18 rays out 
 of -every 1,000 are reflected by water, 25 rays per 1,000 by 
 glass, while 666 per 1,000 are reflected by mercury. 
 
 61. When the rays strike obliquely, a greater amount 
 of light than that stated in 60, is reflected by water and 
 glass. Thus, at an incidence of 40, water reflects 22 rays ; 
 at 60, 65 rays ; at 80, 333 rays ; and at 89j (almost 
 grazing the surface), it reflects 721 rays out of every 1,000. 
 This is as much as mercury reflects at the same incidence. 
 
 62. The augmentation of the light reflected as the 
 obliquity of incidence is increased may be illustrated by 
 our basin of water. Hold the candle so that its rays en- 
 close a large angle with the liquid surface, and notice the 
 brightness of its image. Lower both the candle and the 
 eye until the direct and reflected rays as nearly as possible 
 graze the liquid surface ; the image of the flame is now 
 much brighter than before. 
 
 Reflection from Looking-glasses. Various instructive 
 experiments with a looking-glass may be here performed 
 and understood. 
 
 63. Note first when a candle is placed between the glass 
 and the eye, so that a line from the eye through the candle 
 is perpendicular to the glass, that one well-denned image 
 of the candle only is seen. 
 
VERIFICATION OF THE LAW OF REFLECTION. 25 
 
 G4. Let the eye now be moved so as to receive an ob- 
 lique reflection ; the image is no longer single, a series of 
 images at first partially overlapping each other being seen. 
 By rendering the incidence sufficiently oblique these 
 images, if the glass be sufficiently thick, may be completely 
 separated from each other. 
 
 65. The first image of the series arises from the reflection 
 of the light from the anterior surface of the glass. 
 
 66. The second image, which is usually much the bright- 
 est, arises from reflection at the silvered surface of the glass. 
 At large incidences, as we have just learned, metallic re- 
 flection far transcends that from glass. 
 
 67. The other images of the series are produced by the 
 reverberation of the light. from surface to surface of the 
 glass. At every return from the silvered surface a portion 
 of the light quits the glass and reaches the eye, forming 
 an image ; a portion is also sent back to the silvered sur- 
 face, where it is again reflected. Part of this reflected 
 beam also reaches the eye and yields another image. This 
 process continues : the quantity of light reaching the eye 
 growing gradually less, and, as a consequence, the succes- 
 sive images growing dimmer, until finally they become too 
 dim to be visible. 
 
 68. A very instructive experiment illustrative of the 
 augmentation of the reflection from glass, through aug- 
 mented obliquity, may here be made. Causing the candle 
 and the eye to approach the looking-glass, the first image 
 becomes gradually brighter ; and you end by rendering 
 the image reflected from the glass brighter, more lumi- 
 nous, than that reflected from the metal. Irregularities in 
 the reflection from looking-glasses often show themselves ; 
 but with a good glass and there are few glasses so de- 
 fective as not to possess, at all events, some good portions 
 the succession of images is that here indicated. 
 
 2 
 
26 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 69. Position and Character of Images in Plane Mir- 
 rors. The image in a plane mirror appears as far behind 
 the mirror as the object is in front of it. This follows im- 
 mediately from the law which announces the equality of 
 the angles of incidence and reflection. Draw a line repre- 
 senting the section of a plane mirror ; place a point in front 
 of it. Rays issue from that point, are reflected from the 
 mirror, and strike the pupil of the eye. The pupil is the 
 base of a cone of such rays. Produce the rays backward ; 
 they will intersect behind the mirror, and the point will 
 be seen as if it existed at the place of intersection. The 
 place of intersection is easily proved to be as far behind 
 the mirror as the point is in front of it. 
 
 70. Exercises in determining the positions of images in 
 a plane mirror, the positions of the objects being given, 
 are here desirable. The image is always found by simply 
 letting fall a perpendicular from each point of the object, 
 and producing it behind the mirror, so as to make the part 
 behind equal to the part in front. We thus learn that the 
 image is of the same size and shape as the object, agreeing 
 with it in all respects save one the image is a lateral in- 
 version of the object. 
 
 71. This inversion enables us, by means of a mirror, to 
 read writing written backward, as if it were written in the 
 usual way. Compositors arrange their type in this back- 
 ward fashion, the type being reversed by the process of 
 printing. A looking-glass enables us to read the type as 
 the printed page. 
 
 72. Lateral inversion comes into play when we look at 
 our own faces in a glass. The right cheek of the object, 
 for example, is the left cheek of the image ; the right hand 
 of the object the left hand of the image, etc. The hair 
 parted on the left in the object is seen parted to the right 
 of the image, etc. 
 
REFLECTION FROM CURVED SURFACES. 27 
 
 73. A plane mirror half the height of an object gives 
 an image which embraces the whole height. This is readily 
 deduced from what has gone before. 
 
 74. If a plane mirror be caused to move parallel with 
 itself, the motion of an image in the mirror moves with 
 twice its rapidity. 
 
 75. The same is true of a rotating mirror: when a 
 plane mirror is caused to rotate, the angle described by 
 the image is twice that described by the mirror. 
 
 76. In a mirror inclined at an angle of 45 degrees to 
 the horizon, the image of an erect object appears hori- 
 zontal, while the image of a horizontal object appears 
 erect. 
 
 77. An object placed between two mirrors enclosing 
 an angle yields a number of images depending upon the 
 angle enclosed by the mirrors. The smaller the angle, the 
 greater is the number of images. To find the number of 
 images, divide 360 by the number of degrees in the angle 
 enclosed by the two mirrors, the quotient, if a whole 
 number, will be the number of images, plus one, or it will 
 include the images and the object. The construction of 
 the kaleidoscope depends on this. 
 
 78. When the angle becomes in other words, when 
 the mirrors are parallel the number of images is infinite. 
 Practically, however, we see between parallel mirrors a 
 long succession of images, which become gradually feebler, 
 and finally cease to be sensible to the eye. 
 
 Reflection from Curved Surf aces : Concave Mirrors. 
 
 79. It has been already stated and illustrated that light 
 moves in straight lines, which receive the name of rays. 
 Such rays may be either divergent, parallel, or convergent. 
 
 80. Rays issuing from terrestrial points are necessarily 
 divergent. Rays from the sun or stars are, in consequence 
 
28 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 of the immense distances of these objects, sensibly par- 
 allel. 
 
 81. By suitably reflecting them, we can render the 
 rays from terrestrial sources either parallel or convergent. 
 This is done by means of concave mirrors. 
 
 82. In its reflection from such mirrors, light obeys the 
 law already enunciated for plane mirrors. The angle of 
 incidence is equal to the angle of reflection. 
 
 FIG. 1. 
 
 M 
 
 83. Let M N be a very small portion of the circum- 
 ference of a circle with its centre at O. Let the line a or, 
 passing through the centre, cut the arc M N" into two equal 
 parts at a. Then imagine the curve M N twirled round 
 a x as a fixed axis ; the curve would describe part of a 
 spherical surface. Suppose the surface turned toward x to 
 be silvered over, we should then have a concave spherical 
 reflector ; and we have now to understand the action of 
 this reflector upon light. 
 
 84. The line a x is the principal axis of the mirror. 
 .85. All rays from a point placed at the centre O strike 
 
 the surface of the mirror as perpendiculars, and after re- 
 flection return to O. 
 
 86. A luminous point placed on the axis beyond O, say 
 
REFLECTION FROM CURVED SURFACES. 29 
 
 at jc, throws a divergent cone of rays upon the mirror. 
 These rays are rendered convergent on reflection, and they 
 intersect each other at some point on the axis between the 
 centre O and the mirror. In every case the direct and the 
 reflected rays (xm and mx' for example) enclose equal 
 angles with the radius (O m) drawn to the point of inci- 
 dence. 
 
 87. Supposing x to be exceedingly distant, say as far 
 away as the sun from the small mirror or, more cor- 
 rectly, supposing it to be infinitely distant then the rays 
 falling upon the mirror will be parallel. After reflection 
 such rays intersect each other, at a point midway between 
 the mirror and its centre. 
 
 88. This point, which is marked F in the figure, is the 
 principal focus of the mirror ; that is to say, the principal 
 focus is the focus of parallel rays. 
 
 89. The distance between the surface of the mirror and 
 its principal focus is called the focal distance. 
 
 90. In optics, the position of an object and of its image 
 are always exchangeable. If a luminous point be placed 
 in the principal focus, the rays from it will, after reflection, 
 be parallel. If the point be placed anywhere between the 
 principal focus and the centre O, the rays after reflection 
 will cut the axis at some point beyond the centre. 
 
 91. If the point be placed between the principal focus 
 F and the mirror, the rays after reflection will be divergent 
 they will not intersect at all there will be no real focus. 
 
 92. But if these divergent rays be produced backward, 
 they will intersect behind the mirror, and form there what 
 is called a virtual, or imaginary focus. 
 
 Before proceeding further, it is necessary that these 
 simple details should be thoroughly mastered. Given the 
 position of a point in the axis of a concave mirror, no dif- 
 
30 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 ficulty must be experienced in finding the position of the 
 image of that point, nor in determining whether the focus 
 is virtual or real. 
 
 93. It will thus become evident that, while a point 
 moves from an infinite distance to the centre of a spherical 
 mirror, the image of that point moves only over the dis- 
 tance between the principal focus and the centre. Con- 
 versely, it will be seen that during the passage of a lumi- 
 nous point from the centre to the principal focus, the 
 image of the point moves from the centre to an infinite 
 distance. 
 
 94. The point and its image occupy what are called 
 conjugate foci. If the last note be understood, it will be 
 seen that the conjugate foci move in opposite directions, 
 and that they coincide at the centre of the mirror. 
 
 95. If instead of a point an object of sensible dimen- 
 sions be placed beyond the centre of the mirror, an in- 
 verted image of the object diminished in size will be 
 formed between the centre and the principal focus. 
 
 96. If the object be placed between the centre and the 
 principal focus, an inverted and magnified image of the 
 object will be formed beyond the centre. The positions 
 of the image and its object are, it will be remembered, 
 convertible. 
 
 97. In the two cases mentioned in 95 and 96 the image 
 is formed in the air in front of the mirror. It is a real 
 image. But if the object be placed between the principal 
 focus and the mirror, an erect and magnified image of the 
 object is seen behind the mirror. The image is here virtual. 
 The rays enter the eye as if they came from an object be- 
 hind the mirror. 
 
 98. It is plain that the images seen in a common look- 
 ing-glass are all virtual images. 
 
 99. It is now to be noted that what has been here 
 
CAUSTICS BY REFLECTION. 31 
 
 stated regarding the gathering of rays to a single focus 
 by a spherical mirror is only true when the mirror forms 
 a small fraction of the spherical surface. Even then it is 
 only practically, not strictly and theoretically, true. 
 
 Caustics by Reflection ( Catacaustics). 
 
 100. When a large fraction of the spherical surface is 
 employed as a mirror, the rays are not all collected to a 
 point; their intersections, on the contrary, form a lumi- 
 nous surface, which in optics is called a caustic (German, 
 Brennflache). 
 
 101. The interior surface of a common drinking-glass 
 is a curved reflector. Let the glass be nearly filled with 
 milk, and a lighted candle placed beside it; a caustic 
 curve will be drawn upon the surface of the milk. A 
 carefully-bent hoop, silvered within, also shows the caustic 
 very beautifully. The focus of a spherical mirror is the 
 cusp of its caustic. 
 
 102. Aberration. The deviation of any ray from this 
 cusp is called the aberration of the ray. The inability of 
 a spherical mirror to collect all the rays falling upon it 
 to a single point is called the spherical aberration of the 
 mirror. 
 
 103. Heal images, as already stated, are formed in the 
 air in front of a concave mirror, and they may be seen 
 in the air by an eye placed among the divergent rays be- 
 yond the image. If an opaque screen, say of thick paper, 
 intersect the image, it is projected on the screen and is 
 seen in all positions by an eye placed in front of the screen. 
 If the screen be semi-transparent, say of ground glass or 
 tracing-paper, the image is seen by an eye placed either in 
 front of the screen or behind it. The images in phantas- 
 magoria are thus formed. 
 
 Concave spherical surfaces are usually employed as 
 
32 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 burning-mirrors. By condensing the sunbeams with a 
 mirror 3 feet in diameter and of 2 feet focal distance, very 
 powerful effects may be obtained. At the focus, water is 
 rapidly boiled, and combustible bodies are immediately 
 set on fire. Thick paper bursts into flame with explosive 
 violence, and a plank is pierced as with a hot iron. 
 
 Convex Mirrors. 
 
 104. In the case of a convex spherical mirror the posi- 
 tions of its foci and of its images are found as in the case 
 of a concave mirror. But all the foci and all the images 
 of a convex mirror are virtual. 
 
 105. Thus to find the principal focus you draw parallel 
 rays which, on reflection, enclose angles with the radii 
 equal to those enclosed by the direct rays. The reflected 
 rays are here divergent / but on being produced back- 
 ward, they intersect at the principal focus behind the 
 mirror. 
 
 106. The drawing of two lines suffices to fix the posi- 
 tion of the image of any point of an object either in con- 
 cave or convex spherical mirrors. A ray drawn from the 
 point through the centre of the mirror will be reflected 
 through the centre ; a ray drawn parallel to the axis of 
 the mirror will, after reflection, pass, or its production 
 will pass, through the principal focus. The intersection 
 of these two reflected rays determines the position of the 
 image of the point. Applying this construction to objects 
 of sensible magnitude, it follows that the image of an 
 object in a convex mirror is always erect and diminished. 
 
 107. If the mirror be parabolic instead of spherical, all 
 parallel rays falling upon the mirror are collected to a 
 point at its focus ; conversely, a luminous point placed at 
 the focus sends forth parallel rays : there is no aberration. 
 If the mirror be elliptical, all rays emitted from one of the 
 
REFRACTION OF LIGHT. 33 
 
 foci of the ellipsoid are collected together at the other. 
 Parabolic reflectors are employed in light-houses, where 
 it is an object to send a powerful beam, consisting of rays 
 as nearly as possible parallel, far out to sea. In this case 
 the centre of the flame is placed in the focus of the mirror ; 
 but, inasmuch as the flame is of sensible magnitude, and 
 not a mere point, the rays of the reflected beam are not 
 accurately parallel. 
 
 The Refraction of Light (Dioptrics). 
 
 108. We have hitherto confined our attention to the 
 portion of a beam of light which rebounds from the re- 
 flecting surface. But, in general, a portion of the beam 
 also enters the reflecting substance, being rapidly quenched 
 when the substance is opaque (see note 11), and freely 
 transmitted when the substance is transparent. 
 
 109. Thus in the case of water, mentioned in note 60, 
 when the incidence is perpendicular all the rays are trans- 
 mitted, save the 18 referred to as being reflected. That 
 is to say, 982 out of every 1,000 rays enter the water and 
 pass through it. 
 
 110. So likewise in the case of mercury, mentioned in 
 the same note; 334 out of every 1,000 rays falling on the 
 mercury at a perpendicular incidence, enter the metal and 
 are quenched at a minute depth beneath its surface. 
 
 We have now to consider that portion of the luminous 
 beam which enters the reflecting substance ; taking, as an 
 illustrative case, the passage from air into water. 
 
 111. If the beam fall upon the water as a perpendicu- 
 lar, it pursues a straight course through the water : if the 
 incidence be oblique, the direction of the beam is changed 
 at the point where it enters the water. 
 
34 
 
 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 112. This bending of the beam is called refraction. 
 Its amount is different in different substances. 
 
 FIG. 2. 
 
 m 
 
 113. The refraction of light obeys a perfectly rigid 
 law which must be clearly understood. Let A B C D, Fig. 
 2, be the section of a cylindrical vessel which is half filled 
 with water, its surface being AC. E is the centre of the 
 circular section of the cylinder, and B D is a perpendicular 
 to the surface at E. Let the cylindrical envelope of the 
 vessel be opaque, say of brass or tin, and let an aperture 
 be imagined in it at B, through which a narrow light- 
 beam passes to the point E. The beam will pursue a 
 straight course to D without turning to the right or to the 
 left. 
 
 114. Let the aperture be imagined at m, the beam 
 striking the surface of the water at E obliquely. Its course 
 on entering the liquid will be changed ; it will pursue the 
 track E n. 
 
 115. Draw the line m o perpendicular to B D, and also 
 the line n p perpendicular to the same B D. It is always 
 found that m o divided by n p is a constant quantity, no 
 matter what may be the angle at which the ray enters the 
 water. 
 
REFRACTION OF LIGHT. 35 
 
 116. The angle marked x above the surface is called 
 the angle of incidence ; the angle at y below the surface 
 is called the angle of refraction ; and if we regard the 
 radius of the circle A B C D as unity or 1, the line m o 
 will be the sine of the angle of incidence ; while the line 
 n p will be the sine of the angle of refraction. 
 
 11V. Hence the ill-important optical law The sine of 
 the angle of incidence divided by the sine of the angle of 
 refraction is a constant quantity. However these angles 
 may vary in size, this bond of relationship is never severed. 
 If one of them be lessened or augmented, the other must 
 diminish or increase so as to obey this law. Thus if the 
 incidence be along the dotted line m' E, the refraction will 
 be along the line E n\ but the ratio of m' o' to n' p' will 
 be precisely the same as that of m o to n p. 
 
 118. The constant quantity here referred to is called 
 the index of refraction. 
 
 119. One word more is necessary to the full compre- 
 hension of the term sine, and of the experimental demon- 
 stration of the law of refraction. When one number is 
 divided by another the quotient is called the ratio of the 
 one number to the other. Thus 1 divided by 2 is ^, and 
 this is the ratio of 1 to 2. Thus also 2 divided by 1 is 2, and 
 this is the ratio of 2 to 1. In like manner 12 divided by 
 3 is 4, and this is the ratio of 12 to 3. Conversely, 3 di- 
 vided by 12 is ^, and this is the ratio of 3 to 12. 
 
 120. In a right-angled triangle the ratio of any side 
 to the hypothenuse is found by dividing that side by the 
 hypothenuse. This ratio is the sine of the angle opposite 
 to the side, however large or small the triangle may be. 
 Thus in Fig. 2 the sine of the angle x in the right-angled 
 triangle E o m is really the ratio of the line o m to the 
 hypothenuse E m it would be expressed in a fractional 
 
 form thus, ^ . In like manner the sine of y is the ratio 
 Hi m 
 
36 NOTES ON LIGHT, 
 
 of the line np to the hypothenuse E w, and would be ex- 
 pressed in a fractional form thus, *j~. These fractions are 
 
 the sines of the respective angles, whatever be the length 
 of the line E m or E n. In the particular case above re- 
 ferred to, where these lines are considered as units, the 
 
 f , . mo _ n p 
 
 tractions -y- and --, or in other words m o and n p^ be- 
 come, as stated, the sines of the respective angles. We 
 are now prepared to understand a simple but rigid dem- 
 onstration of the law of refraction. 
 
 FIG. 3. 
 
 r H - - 
 
 121. ML J K is a cell with parallel glass sides and one 
 opaque end M L The light of a candle placed at A falls 
 into the vessel, the end ML casting a shadow which 
 reaches to the point E. Fill the vessel with water the 
 shadow retreats to PI through the refraction of the light 
 at the point where it enters the water. 
 
 122. The angle enclosed between M E and M L is equal 
 to the angle of incidence a?, and, in accordance with the 
 
 L 
 
 definition given in 120,-^- ^ is its sine 
 
 sine of the angle of refraction y. All these lines can be 
 
 while - - is the 
 
REFRACTION OF LIGHT. 37 
 
 either measured or calculated. If they be thus determined, 
 and if the division be actually made, it will always be found 
 
 T TM T TT 
 
 that the two quotient s-^-^ and ^ ==rStand in a constant 
 
 ratio to each other, whatever the angle may be at which 
 the light from A strikes the surface of the liquid. This 
 
 4 
 ratio in the case of water is , or, expressed in decimals, 
 
 1.333.* 
 
 123. When the light passes from air into water, the 
 refracted ray is bent toward the perpendicular. This is 
 generally, but not always, the case when the light passes 
 from a rarer to a denser medium. 
 
 124. The principle of reversibility which runs through 
 the whole of optics finds illustration here. When the ray 
 passes from water to air it is bent/rom the perpendicular: 
 it accurately reverses its course. 
 
 125. If instead of water we employed vinegar the ratio 
 would be 1.344 ; with brandy it would be 1.360 ; with rec- 
 tified spirit. of wine 1.372 ; with oil of almonds or with 
 olive oil 1.470; with spirit of turpentine 1.605; w T ithoilof 
 aniseseed 1.538; with oil of bitter almonds 1.471; with 
 bisulphide of carbon 1.678 ; with phosphorus 2.24. 
 
 126. These numbers express the indices of refraction 
 of the various substances mentioned ; all of them refract 
 the light more powerfully than water, and it is worthy of 
 remark that, all of them, except vinegar, are combustible 
 substances. 
 
 127. It was the observation on the part of Newton, 
 that, having regard to their density, "unctuous sub- 
 stances" as a general rule refracted light powerfully, 
 coupled with the fact that the index of refraction of the 
 diamond reached, according. to his measurements, so high 
 
 . * More accurately, 1.33G. 
 
38 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 a figure as 2.439, that caused him to foresee the possible 
 combustible nature of the diamond. The bold prophecy 
 of Newton* has been fulfilled, the combustion of a dia- 
 mond being one of the commonest experiments of modern 
 chemistry. 
 
 128. It is here worth noting that the refraction by 
 spirit of turpentine is greater than that by water, though 
 the density of the spirit is to that of the water as 874 is to 
 1,000. A ray passing obliquely from the spirit of turpen- 
 tine into water is bent from the perpendicular, though it 
 passes from a rarer to a denser medium ; while a ray pass- 
 ing from water into the spirit of turpentine is bent toward 
 the perpendicular, though it passes from a denser to a 
 rarer medium. Hence the necessity for the words " not 
 always " employed in 123. 
 
 129. If a ray of light pass through a refracting plate 
 with parallel surfaces, or through any number of plates 
 with parallel surfaces, on regaining the medium from 
 which it started, its original direction is restored. This 
 follows from the principle of reversibility already re- 
 ferred to. 
 
 130. In passing through a refracting body, or through 
 any number of refracting bodies, the light accomplishes its 
 transit in the minimum of time. That is to say, given the 
 velocity of light in the various media, the path chosen by 
 the ray, or, in other words, the path which its refraction 
 imposes upon the ray, enables it to perform its journey in 
 the most rapid manner possible. 
 
 131. Refraction always causes water to appear shal- 
 lower, or a transparent plate of any kind thinner, than it 
 
 * " Car ce grand homme, qui mettait la plus grande severitS dans ses 
 experiences, et la plus grande reserve dans ses conjectures, n'hesitait 
 jamais a suivre les consequences d!une verite aussi loin qu'elle pouvait 
 le conduire." BIOT. 
 
OPACITY OF TRANSPARENT MIXTURES. 39 
 
 really is. The lifting up of the lower surface of a glass 
 cube, through this cause, is very remarkable. 
 
 132. To understand why the water appears shallower, 
 fix your attention on a point at its bottom, and suppose 
 the line of vision from that point to the eye to be perpen- 
 dicular to the surface of the water. Of all rays issuing 
 from the point, the perpendicular one alone reaches the eye 
 without refraction. Those close to the perpendicular, on 
 emerging from the water, have their divergence augmented 
 by refraction. Producing these divergent rays backward, 
 they intersect at a point above the real bottom, and at this 
 point the bottom will be seen. 
 
 133. The apparent shallowness is augmented by looking 
 obliquely into the water. 
 
 134. In consequence of this apparent rise of the bottom, 
 a straight stick thrust into the water is bent at the surface 
 from the perpendicular. 
 
 Note the difference between the deportment of the stick 
 and of a luminous beam. The beam on entering the water 
 is bent toward the perpendicular. 
 
 135. This apparent lifting of the bottom when water is 
 poured into a basin brings into sight an object at the bot- 
 tom of the basin which is unseen when the basin is empty. 
 
 Opacity of Transparent Mixtures. 
 
 136. Reflection always accompanies refraction; and if 
 one of these disappear, the other will disappear also. A 
 solid body immersed in a liquid having the same refractive 
 index as the solid, vanishes ; it is no more seen than a por- 
 tion of the liquid itself of the same size would be seen. 
 
 137. But in the passage from one medium to another 
 of a different refractive index, light is always reflected ; 
 and this reflection may be so often repeated as to render 
 the mixture of two transparent substances practically im- 
 
40 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 pervious to light. It is the frequency of the reflections at 
 the limiting surfaces of air and water that renders foam 
 opaque. The blackest clouds owe their gloom to this re- 
 peated reflection, which diminishes their transmitted light. 
 Hence also their whiteness by reflected light. To a similar 
 cause is due the whiteness and imperviousiiess of common 
 salt, and of transparent bodies generally when crushed to 
 powder. The individual particles transmit light freely; 
 but the reflections at their surfaces are so numerous that 
 the light is wasted in echoes before it can reach to any 
 depth in the powder. 
 
 138. The whiteness and opacity of writing-paper are 
 due mainly to the same cause. It is a web of transparent 
 fibres, not in optical contact, which intercept the light by 
 repeatedly reflecting it. 
 
 139. But if the interstices of the fibres be filled by a 
 body of the same refractive index as the fibres themselves, 
 the reflection at their limiting surfaces is destroyed, and 
 the paper is rendered transparent. This is the philosophy 
 of the tracing-paper used by engineers. It is saturated 
 with some kind of oil, the lines of maps and drawings 
 being easily copied through it afterward. Water aug- 
 ments the transparency of paper, as it darkens a white 
 towel ; but its refractive index is too low to confer on 
 either any high degree of transparency. It, however, 
 renders certain minerals, which are opaque when dry, 
 translucent. 
 
 140. The higher the refractive index the more copious 
 is the reflection. The refractive index of water, for ex- 
 ample, is 1.336; that of glass is 1.5. Hence the different 
 quantities of light reflected by water and glass at a per- 
 pendicular incidence, as mentioned in note 60. It is its 
 enormous refractive strength that confers such brilliancy 
 upon the diamond. 
 
TOTAL REFLECTION. 41 
 
 Total Reflection. 
 
 Read notes 123 and 124 ; then continue here. 
 
 141. When the angle of incidence from air into water 
 is nearly 90, that is to say, when the ray before entering 
 the water just grazes its surface, the angle of refraction is 
 "48^. Conversely, when a ray passing from water into air 
 strikes the surface at an angle of 48J- , it will, on its emer- 
 gence, just graze the surface of the water. 
 
 142. If the angle which the ray in water encloses with 
 the perpendicular to the surface be greater than 48-|-, the 
 ray will not quit the water at all : it will be totally reflected 
 at the surface. 
 
 143. The angle which marks the limit where total re- 
 flection begins is called the limiting angle of the medium. 
 For water this angle is 48 27', for flint glass it is 38 41', 
 while for diamond it is 23 42'. 
 
 144. Realize clearly that a bundle of light rays filling 
 an angular space of 90 before they enter the water, are 
 squeezed into an angular space of 48 27' within the water, 
 and that in the case of diamond the condensation is from 
 90 to 23 42'. 
 
 145. To an eye in still water its margin must appear- 
 lifted up. A fish, for example, sees objects, as it were, 
 through a circular aperture of about 97 (twice 47 27') in 
 diameter overhead. All objects down to the horizon will 
 be visible in this space, and those near the horizon will be 
 much distorted and contracted in dimensions, especially in 
 height. Beyond the limits of this circle will be seen the 
 bottom of the water totally reflected, and therefore de- 
 picted as vividly as if seen by direct vision.* 
 
 146. A similar effect, exerted by the atmosphere (when 
 
 16 Sir John Hcrschcl. 
 
42 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 no clouds cross the orbs), gives the sun and moon at rising 
 and setting a slightly flattened appearance. 
 
 147. Experimental Illustrations. Place a shilling in a 
 drinking-glass ; cover it with water to about the depth of 
 an inch, and tilt the glass so as to obtain the necessary 
 obliquity of incidence at the surface. Looking upward 
 toward the surface, the image of the shilling will be seen 
 shining there, and, as the reflection is total, the image will 
 be as bright as the shilling itself. A spoon suitably 
 dipped into the glass also yields an image due to total re- 
 flection. 
 
 148. Thrust the closed end of an empty test-tube into 
 a glass of water. Incline the tube, until the horizontal 
 light falling upon it shall be totally reflected upward. 
 When looked down upon, the tube appears shining like 
 burnished silver. Pour a little water into the tube : as the 
 liquid rises, it abolishes total reflection, and with it the 
 lustre, leaving a gradually diminishing lustrous zone, which 
 disappears wholly when the level of the water within rises 
 to, or above, that of the water without. A tube of any 
 kind stopped water-tight will answer for this experiment, 
 which is both beautiful and instructive. 
 
 149. If a ray of light fall as a perpendicular on the 
 side of a right-angled isosceles glass prism, it will enter 
 the glass and strike the hypothenuse at an angle of 45. 
 This exceeds the limiting angle of glass ; the ray will 
 therefore be totally reflected ; and, in accordance with the 
 law mentioned in note 54, the direct and reflected rays 
 will be at right angles to each other. When such a change 
 of direction is required in optical instruments, a right- 
 angled isosceles prism is usually employed. 
 
 150. When the ray enters the prism parallel to the 
 hypothenuse, it will be refracted, and will strike the hy- 
 pothenuse at an angle greater than the limiting angle. It 
 
TOTAL REFLECTION. 43 
 
 will, therefore, be totally reflected. If the object, instead 
 of being a point, be of sensible magnitude, the rays from 
 its extremities will cross each other within the prism, and 
 hence the object will appear inverted when looked at 
 through the prism. Dove has applied the " reversion prism " 
 to render erect the inverted images of the astronomical 
 telescope. 
 
 151. The mirage of the desert and various other phan- 
 tasmal appearances in the atmosphere are, in part, due to 
 total reflection. When the sun heats an expanse of sand, 
 the layer of air in contact with the sand becomes lighter 
 than the superincumbent air. The rays from a distant 
 object, a tree for example, striking very obliquely upon 
 the upper surface of this layer, may be totally reflected, 
 thus showing images similar to those produced by a sur- 
 face of water. The thirsty soldiers of the French army 
 were tantalized by such appearances in Egypt. 
 
 152. Gases, like liquids and solids, can refract and re- 
 flect light ; but, in consequence of the lowness of their 
 refractive indices, both reflection and refraction are feeble. 
 Still, atmospheric refraction has to be taken into account 
 by the astronomer, and by those engaged in trigonomet- 
 rical surveys. The refraction of the atmosphere causes 
 the sun to be seen before it actually rises, and after it act- 
 ually sets. 
 
 153. The quivering of objects seen through air rising 
 over a heated surface is due to irregular refraction, which 
 incessantly shifts the directions of the rays of light. 
 In the air this shifting of the rays is never entirely 
 absent, and it is often a source of grievous annoyance 
 to the astronomer who needs a homogeneous atmos- 
 phere. 
 
 154. The flame of a candle or of a gas-lamp, and the 
 column of heated air above the flame ; the air rising from 
 
44 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 a red-hot iron ; the pouring of a heavy gas, such as car- 
 bonic acid, downward into air; and the issue of a lighter 
 one, such as hydrogen, upward may all be made to 
 reveal themselves by their action upon a sufficiently in- 
 tense light. The transparent gases interposed between 
 such a light and a white screen are seen to rise like smoke 
 upon the screen through the effects of refraction. 
 
 Lenses. 
 
 155. A lens in optics is a portion of a refracting sub- 
 stance, such as glass, which is bounded by curved sur- 
 faces. If the surface be spherical, the lens is called a 
 spherical lens. 
 
 156. Lenses divide themselves into two classes, one of 
 which renders parallel rays convergent, the other of which 
 renders such rays divergent. Each class comprises three 
 kinds of lenses, which are named as follows : 
 
 Converging Lenses. 
 
 1. Double convex, with both surfaces convex. 
 
 2. Plano-convex, with one surface plane and the other 
 convex. 
 
 3. Concavo-convex (Meniscus), with a concave and 
 a convex surface, the convex surface being the most 
 strongly curved. 
 
 Diverging Lenses. 
 
 1. Double concave, with both surfaces concave. 
 
 2. Plano-concave, with one surface plane and the 
 other concave. 
 
 3. Convexo-concave, with a convex and a concave 
 surface, the concave surface being the most strongly 
 curved. 
 
LENSES. 45 
 
 157. A straight line drawn through the centre of the 
 lens, and perpendicular to its two convex surfaces, is the 
 principal axis of the lens. 
 
 158. A luminous beam falling on a convex lens parallel 
 to the axis, has its constituent rays brought to intersec- 
 tion at a point in the axis behind the lens. This point is 
 the principal focus of the lens. As before, the principal 
 focus is the focus of parallel rays. 
 
 159. The rays from a luminous point placed beyond 
 the focus intersect at the opposite side of the lens, an 
 image of the point being formed at the place of intersec- 
 tion. As the point approaches the principal focus its 
 image retreats from it, and when the point actually 
 reaches the principal focus, its image is at an infinite 
 distance. 
 
 160. If the principal focus be passed, and the point 
 come between that focus and the lens, the rays after pass- 
 ing through the lens will be still divergent. Producing 
 them backward, they will intersect on that side of the 
 lens on which stands the luminous point. The focus here 
 is virtual. A body of sensible magnitude placed between 
 the focus and the lens would have a virtual image. 
 
 161. When an object of sensible dimensions is placed 
 anywhere beyond the principal focus, a real image of the 
 object will be formed in the air behind the lens. The 
 image maybe either greater or less than the object in size, 
 but the image will always be inverted. 
 
 162. The .positions of the image and the object are, as 
 before, convertible. 
 
 163. In the case of concave lenses the images are al- 
 ways virtual. 
 
 164. A spherical lens is incompetent to bring all the 
 rays that fall upon it to the same focus. The rays which 
 pass through the lens near its circumference are more 
 
46 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 refracted than those which pass through the central por- 
 tions, and they intersect earlier. Where perfect definition 
 is required it is therefore usual, though at the expense of 
 illumination, to make use of the central rays only. 
 
 165. This difference of focal distance between the cen- 
 tral and circumferential rays is called the spherical aberra- 
 tion of the lens. A lens so curved as to bring all rays to 
 the same focus is called aplanatic / a spherical lens cannot 
 be rendered aplanatic. 
 
 166. As in the case of spherical mirrors, spherical lenses 
 have their caustic curves and surfaces (diacaustics) formed 
 by the intersection of the refracted rays. 
 
 "Vision and the Eye. 
 
 167. The human eye is a compound lens, consisting 
 of three principal parts : the aqueous humor, the crystal- 
 line lens, and the vitreous humor. 
 
 1C 8. The aqueous humor is held in front of the eye by 
 the cornea, a transparent, horny capsule, resembling a 
 watch-glass in shape. Behind the aqueous humor, and 
 immediately in front of the Crystalline lens, is the iris, 
 which surrounds the pupil. Then follow the lens and 
 the vitreous humor, which last constitutes the main body 
 of the eye. The average diameter of the human eye is 
 10.9 lines.* 
 
 169. When the optic nerve enters the eye from behind, 
 .it divides into a series of filaments, which are woven to- 
 gether to form the retina, a delicate net-work spread as a 
 screen at the back of the eye. The retina rests upon a 
 black pigment, which reduces to a minimum all internal 
 reflection. 
 
 1*70. By means of the iris the size of the pupil may be 
 caused to vary within certain limits. When the light is 
 
 * A line is -^ th of an inch. 
 
VISION AND THE EYE. 47 
 
 feeble the pupil expands, 'when it is intense the pupil con- 
 tracts ; thus the quantity of light admitted into the eye 
 is, to some extent, regulated. The pupil also diminishes 
 when the eye is fixed upon a near object, and expands 
 when it is fixed upon a distant one. 
 
 171. The pupil appears black; partly because of the ' 
 internal black coating, but mainly for another reason. 
 Could we illuminate the retina, and see at the same time 
 the illuminated spot, the pupil would appear bright. But 
 the principle of reversibility, so often spoken of, comes 
 into play here. The light of the illuminated spot in re- 
 turning outward retraces its steps, and finally falls upon 
 the source of illumination. Hence, to receive the return- 
 ing rays, the observer's eye ought to be placed between 
 the source and the retina. But in this position it would 
 cut off the illumination. If the light be thrown into the 
 eye by a mirror pierced with a small orifice, or with a 
 small portion of the silvering removed, then the eye of 
 the observer placed behind the mirror, and looking through 
 the orifice, may see the illuminated retina. The pupil 
 under these circumstances glows like a live coal. This is 
 the principle of the Ophthalmoscope (Augenspiegel, Helin- 
 holtz), an instrument by which the interior of the eye 
 may be scanned, and its condition in health or disease 
 noted. 
 
 172. In the case of albinos, or of white rabbits, the 
 black pigment is absent, and the pupil is seen red by light 
 which passes through the sclerotica, or white of the eye. 
 When this light is cut off, the pupil of an albino appears 
 black. In some animals the black pigment is displaced 
 by a reflecting membrane, the tapetum. It is the light 
 reflected from the tapetum which causes a cat's eye to 
 shine in partial darkness. The light in this case is not 
 internal, for when the darkness is total the cat's eyes do 
 not shine. 
 
48 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 173. In the camera obscura'of the photographer the 
 images of external objects formed by a convex lens are 
 received upon a plate of ground glass, the lens being 
 pushed in or out until the image upon the glass is sharply 
 defined. 
 
 174. The eye is a camera obscura, with its refracting 
 lenses, the retina playing the part of the plate of ground 
 glass in the ordinary camera. For perfectly distinct 
 vision it is necessary that the image upon the retina should 
 be perfectly defined ; in other words, that the rays from 
 every point of the object looked at should be converged 
 to a point upon the retina. 
 
 175. The image upon the retina is inverted. 
 
 Adjustment of the Eye : Use of Spectacles. 
 
 176. If the letters of a book held at some distance from 
 the eye be looked at through a gauze veil placed nearer 
 the eye, it will be found that when the letters are seen 
 distinctly, the veil is seen indistinctly ; conversely, if the 
 veil be seen distinctly, the letters will be seen indistinct- 
 ly. This demonstrates that the images of objects at dif- 
 ferent distances from the eye cannot be defined at the same 
 time upon the retina. 
 
 177. Were the eye a rigid mass, like a glass lens, in- 
 capable of change of form, distinct vision would only be 
 possible at one particular distance. We know, however, 
 that the eye possesses a power of adjustment for different 
 distances. This adjustment is effected, not by pushing 
 the front of the eye backward or forward, but by chan- 
 ging the curvature of the crystalline lens. 
 
 178. The image of a candle reflected from the forward 
 or backward surface of the lens is seen to diminish when 
 the eye changes from distant to near vision, thus proving 
 
ADJUSTMENT OF THE EYE: USE OF SPECTACLES. 49 
 
 ' .. 
 
 the curvature of the lens to be greater for near than for 
 distant vision. 
 
 179. The principal refraction endured by rays of light 
 in crossing the eye occurs at the surface of the cornea, 
 where the passage is from air to a much denser medium. 
 The refraction at the cornea alone would cause the rays 
 to intersect at a point nearly half an inch behind the 
 retina. The convergence is augmented by the crystalline 
 lens, which brings the point of intersection forward to the 
 retina itself. 
 
 180. A line drawn through the centre of the cornea 
 and the centre of the whole eye to the retina is called the 
 axis of the eye. The length of the axis, even in youth, is 
 sometimes too small ; in other words, the retina is some- 
 times too near the cornea ; so that the refracting part of 
 the organ is unable to converge the rays from a luminous 
 point so as to bring them to a point upon the retina. In 
 old age also the refracting surfaces of the eye are slightly 
 flattened, and thus rendered incompetent to refract the 
 rays sufficiently. In both these cases the image would be 
 formed behind the retina, instead of upon it, and hence the 
 vision is indistinct. 
 
 181. The defect is remedied by holding the object at a 
 distance from the eye, so as to lessen the divergence of its 
 rays, or by placing in front of the eye a convex lens, which 
 helps the eye to produce the necessary convergence. This 
 is the use of spectacles. 
 
 182. The eye is also sometimes too long in the direc- 
 tion of the axis, or the curvature of the refracting surfaces 
 may be too great. In either case the rays entering the 
 pupil are converged so as to intersect before reaching the 
 retina. This defect is remedied either by holding the object 
 very close to the eye, so as to augment the divergence of 
 its rays, thus throwing back the point of intersection ; or 
 
 3 
 
50 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 by placing in front of the eye a concave lens, which pro- 
 duces the necessary divergence. 
 
 183. The eye is not adjusted at the same time for 
 equally-distant horizontal and vertical objects. The dis- 
 tance of distinct vision is greater for horizontal lines than 
 for vertical ones. Draw with ink two lines at right angles 
 to each other, the one vertical, the other horizontal : see 
 one of them distinctly black and sharp ; the other appears 
 indistinct, as if drawn in lighter ink. Adjust the eye for 
 this latter line, the former will then appear indistinct. 
 This difference in the curvature of the eye in two direc- 
 tions may sometimes become so great as to render the 
 application of cylindrical lenses necessary for its correc- 
 tion. 
 
 The Punctum Ccecum. 
 
 184. The spot where the optic nerve enters the eye, and 
 from which it ramifies to form the net-work of the retina, 
 is insensible to the action of light. An object whose image 
 falls upon that spot is not seen. The image of a clock- 
 face, of a human head, of the moon, may be caused to fall 
 upon this " blind spot," and when this is the case the object 
 is not visible. 
 
 185. To illustrate this point, proceed thus : Lay two 
 white wafers on black paper, or two black ones on white 
 paper, with an interval of 3 inches between them. Bring 
 the right eye at a height of 10 or 11 inches exactly over 
 the left-hand wafer, so that the line joining the two eyes 
 shall be parallel to the line joining the two wafers. Closing 
 the left eye, and looking steadily with the right at the 
 left-hand wafer, the right-hand one ceases to be visible. 
 In this position the image falls upon the " blind spot " of 
 the right eye. If the eye be turned in the least degree to 
 the right or left, or if the distance between it and the paper 
 
PERSISTENCE OF IMPRESSIONS. 51 
 
 be augmented or diminished, the wafer is immediately 
 seen. Preserving these proportions as to size and distance, 
 objects of far greater dimensions than the wafer may have 
 their images thrown upon the blind spot, and be obliter- 
 ated. 
 
 Persistence of Impressions. 
 
 186. An impression of light once made upon the retina 
 does not subside instantaneously. An electric spark is 
 sensibly instantaneous ; but the impression it makes upon 
 the eye remains for some time after the spark has passed 
 away. This interval of persistence varies with different 
 persons, and amounts to a sensible fraction of a second. 
 
 187. If, therefore, a succession of sparks follow each 
 other at intervals less than the time which the impression 
 endures, the separate impressions will unite to form a con- 
 tinuous light. If a luminous point be caused to describe 
 a circle in less than this interval, the circle will appear as 
 a continuous closed curve. From this cause, also, the 
 spokes of a rapidly-rotating wheel blend together to a 
 shadowy surface. Wheatstone's Photometer is based on 
 this persistence. It also explains the action of those instru- 
 ments in which a series of objects in different positions 
 being brought in rapid succession before the eye, the im- 
 pression of motion is produced. 
 
 188. A jet of water descending from an orifice in the 
 bottom of a vessel exhibits two distinct parts : a tranquil 
 pellucid portion near the orifice, and a turbid or untranquil 
 portion lower down. Both parts of the jet appear equally 
 continuous. But when the jet in a dark room is illumi- 
 nated by an electric spark, all the turbid portion reveals 
 itself as a string of separate drops standing perfectly still. 
 It is their quick succession that produces the impression 
 of continuity. , The most rapid cannon-ball, illuminated by 
 
52 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 a flash of lightning, would be seen for the fraction of a 
 second perfectly motionless in the air. 
 
 189. The eye is by no means a perfect optical instru- 
 ment. It suffers from spherical aberration; a scattered 
 luminosity, more or less strong, always surrounding the 
 defined images of luminous objects upon the retina. By 
 this luminosity the image of the object is sensibly increased 
 in size ; but with ordinary illumination the scattered light 
 is too feeble to be noticed. When, however, bodies are 
 intensely illuminated, more especially when the bodies are 
 small, so that a slight extension of their images upon the 
 retina becomes noticeable, such bodies appear larger than 
 they really are. Thus, a platinum- wire raised to whiteness 
 by a voltaic current has its apparent diameter enormously 
 increased. Thus also the crescent moon seems to belong 
 to a larger sphere than the dimmer mass of the satellite 
 which it partially clasps. Thus also, at considerable dis- 
 tances, the parallel flashes sent from a number of separate 
 lamps and reflectors in a light-house encroach upon each 
 other, and blend together to a single flash. The white- 
 hot particles of carbon in a flame <jfeecribe lines of light, 
 because of their rapid upward motion. These lines are 
 widened to the eye ; and thus a far greater apparent so- 
 lidity is imparted to the flame than in reality belongs to it. 
 189a. This augmentation of the true size of the optical 
 image is called Irradiation. 
 
 Bodies seen within the Eye. 
 
 190. Almost every eye contains bodies more or less 
 opaque distributed through its humors. The so-called 
 muscce volitantes are of this character ; so are the black 
 dots, snake-like lines, beads, and rings, which are strikingly 
 visible in many eyes. Were the area of the pupil con- 
 tracted to a point, such bodies might produce considerable 
 
lUJCM 
 
 v s*v^i A 
 
 BODIES SEEN WITHIN THE EYE. 53 
 
 annoyance ; but because of the width of the pupil the 
 shadows which these small bodies would otherwise cast 
 upon the retina are practically obliterated, except when 
 they are very close to the back of the eye.* It is only 
 necessary to look at the firmament through a pinhole to 
 give these shadows greater definition upon the retina. 
 
 191. The veins and arteries of the retina itself also cast 
 their shadows upon its posterior surface ; but the shaded 
 spaces soon become so sensitive to light as to compensate 
 for the defect of light falling upon them. Hence under 
 ordinary circumstances the shadows are not seen. But if 
 the shadows be transported to a less sensitive portion of 
 the retina, the image of the vessels becomes distinctly 
 visible. 
 
 192. The best mode of obtaining the transference of the 
 shadow is to concentrate in a dark room, by means of a 
 pocket lens of short focus, a small image of the sun or of 
 the electric light upon the white of the eye. Care must be 
 taken not to send the beam through the pupil. When the 
 small lens is caused to move to and fro, the shadows are 
 caused to travel over different portions of the retina, and a 
 perfectly defined image of the veins and arteries is seen 
 projected in the darkness in front of the eye. 
 
 193. Looking into a dark space, and moving a candle 
 at the same time to and fro beside the eye, so that the rays 
 enter the pupil very obliquely, the shadow of the retinal 
 vessels is also obtained. In some eyes the suddenness and 
 vigor with which the spectral image displays itself are 
 extraordinary ; others find it difficult to obtain the effect. 
 
 194. Finally, a delicate image of the vessels maybe 
 obtained by looking through a pinhole at the bright sky, 
 and moving the aperture to and fro. 
 
 * See Notes 18 and 19. 
 
54 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 The Stereoscope. 
 
 195. Look with one eye at the edge of the hand, so that 
 the finger nearest the eye shall cover all the others. Then 
 open the second eye ; by it the other fingers will be seen 
 foreshortened. The images of the hand therefore within 
 the two eyes are different. 
 
 196. These two images are projected on the two retinoe ; 
 if by any means we could combine two drawings, executed 
 on a flat surface, so as to produce within the two eyes two 
 pictures similar to the two images of the solid hand, we 
 should obtain the impression of solidity. This is done by 
 the stereoscope. 
 
 197. The first form of this instrument was invented by 
 Sir Charles Wheatstone. He took drawings of solid objects 
 as seen by the two eyes, and looked at the images of these 
 drawings in two plane mirrors. Each eye looked at the 
 image which belonged to it, and the mirrors were so 
 arranged that the images overlapped, thus appearing to 
 come from the same object. By this combination of its 
 two plane projections, the object sketched was caused to 
 start forth as a solid. 
 
 198. In looking at and combining two such drawings, 
 the eyes receive the same impression, and go through the 
 same process as when they look at the real object. We 
 see only one point of an object distinctly at a time. If the 
 different points of an object be at different distances from 
 the eyes, to see the near points distinctly requires a greater 
 convergence of the axes of the eyes than to see the distant 
 ones. Now, besides the identity of the retinal images of 
 the stereoscopic drawings with those of the real object, the 
 eyes, in order to cause the corresponding pairs of points of 
 the two drawings to coalesce, have to go through the same 
 
THE STEREOSCOPE. 55 
 
 variations of convergence that are necessary to see dis- 
 tinctly the various points of the actual object. Hence the 
 impression of solidity produced by the combination of such 
 drawings. 
 
 199. Measure the distance between two pairs of points, 
 which when combined by the stereoscope present two 
 single points at different distances from the eye. The dis- 
 tance between the one pair will be greater than that 
 between the other pair. Different degrees of convergence 
 are therefore necessary on the part of the eye to combine 
 the two pairs of points. It is to be noted that the coales- 
 cence produced in the stereoscope at any particular moment 
 is only partial. If one pair of corresponding points be 
 seen singly, the others must appear double. This is also 
 the case when an actual solid is looked at with both eyes ; 
 of those points of it which are at different distances from 
 the eyes one only is seen singly at a time. 
 
 200. The impression of solidity may be produced in an 
 exceedingly striking manner without any stereoscope at 
 all. Most easily, thus : Take two drawings projections, 
 as they are called of the frustum of a cone ; the one as it 
 is seen by the right eye, the other as it is seen by the left. 
 Holding them at some distance from the eyes, let the left- 
 hand drawing be looked at by the right eye, and the right- 
 hand drawing by the left. The lines of vision of the two 
 eyes here cross each other ; and it is easy, after a few trials 
 with a pencil-point placed in front of the eyes, to make two 
 corresponding points of the drawings coincide. The mo- 
 ment they coincide, the combined drawings start forth as 
 a single solid, suspended in the air at the place of intersec- 
 tion of the lines of vision. It depends upon the character 
 of the drawings whether the inside of the frustum is seen, 
 or the outside, whether its base or its top seems nearest to 
 the eye. For this experiment the drawings are best made 
 
56 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 in simple outline, and they may be immensely larger than 
 ordinary stereoscopic drawings. 
 
 Take notice that here also the different pairs of the 
 corresponding points are at different distances apart. 
 Two corresponding points, for example, of the top of the 
 frustum will not be the same distance asunder as two 
 points of the base. 
 
 201., Wheatstone's first instrument is called the Re- 
 flecting Stereoscope; but the methods of causing draw- 
 ings to coalesce so as to produce stereoscope effects are 
 almost numberless. The instrument most used by the 
 public is the Lenticular Stereoscope of Sir David Brews- 
 ter. In it the two projections are combined by means of 
 two half lenses with their edges turned inward. The len- 
 ticular stereoscope also magnifies.* 
 
 202. It has been stated in note 198 that for the dis- 
 tinct vision of a near point a greater convergence of the 
 lines of vision of the two eyes is necessary than that of a 
 distant one, By an instrument in which two rectangular 
 prisms are employed,! the rays from two points may be 
 caused to cross before they enter the eyes, the convergence 
 being thus rendered greater for the distant point than 
 for the near one. The consequence of this is, that the 
 near point appears distant, and the distant point near. 
 This is the principle of Wheatstone's pseudoscope. By 
 this instrument convex surfaces are rendered concave, and 
 concave surfaces convex. The inside of a hat or teacup 
 may be thus converted into its outside, while a globe may 
 be seen as a concave spherical surface. 
 
 * Fuller and clearer information regarding the stereoscope will be 
 found in the Journal of the PJiotographic Society, vol. iii. pp. 96, 116, 
 and 167. 
 
 See Note 150. 
 
THEORY OF EMISSION. 57 
 
 Nature of Light ; Physical Theory of Reflection and 
 Refraction. 
 
 It is now time to redeem to some extent the promise 
 of our first note, that the "something" which excites the 
 sensation of light should be considered more closely sub- 
 sequently. 
 
 203. Every sensation corresponds to a motion excited 
 in our nerves. In the sense of touch, the nerves are 
 moved by the contact of the body felt ; in the sense of 
 smell, they are stirred by the infinitesimal particles of the 
 odorous body ; in the sense of hearing, they are shaken 
 by the vibrations of the air. 
 
 Theory of Emission. 
 
 204. Newton supposed light to consist of small parti- 
 cles shot out with inconceivable rapidity by luminous 
 bodies, and fine enough to pass through the pores of trans- 
 parent media. Crossing the humors of the eye, and strik- 
 ing the optic nerve behind the eye, these particles were 
 supposed to excite vision. 
 
 205. This is the Emission Theory or Corpuscular 
 Theory of Light. 
 
 206. Considering the enormous velocity of light, the 
 particles, if they exist, must be inconceivably small ; for 
 if of any conceivable weight, they would infallibly destroy 
 so delicate an organ as the eye. A bit of ordinary mat- 
 ter, one grain in weight, and moving with the velocity of 
 light, would possess the momentum of a cannon-ball 150 
 Ibs. weight, moving with a velocity of 1,000 feet a second. 
 
 207. Millions of these light particles, supposing them 
 to exist, concentrated by lenses and mirrors, have been 
 shot against a balance suspended by a single spider's 
 thread; this thread, though twisted 18,000 times, showed 
 
58 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 no tendency to untwist itself; it was therefore devoid of 
 torsion. But no motion due to the impact of the particles 
 was even in this case observed.* 
 
 208. If light consists of minute particles, they must be 
 shot out with the same velocity by all celestial bodies. 
 This seems exceedingly unlikely, when the different gravi- 
 tating forces of such different masses are taken into ac- 
 count. By the attractions of such diverse masses, the 
 particles would in all probability be pulled back with dif- 
 ferent degrees of force. 
 
 209. If, for example, a fixed star of the sun's density 
 possessed 250 times the sun's diameter, its attraction, sup- 
 posing light to be acted on like ordinary matter, would 
 be sufficient to finally stop the particles of light issuing 
 from it. Smaller masses would exert corresponding de- 
 grees of retardation ; and hence the light emitted by dif- 
 ferent bodies would move with different velocities. That 
 such is not the case that light moves with the same ve- 
 locity whatever be its source renders it probable that it 
 does not consist of particles thus darted forth. 
 
 But a more definite and formidable objection to the 
 Emission Theory may be stated after we have made our- 
 selves acquainted with the account it rendered of the phe- 
 nomena of reflection and refraction. 
 
 210. In direct reflection, according to the emission 
 theory, the light particles are first of all stopped in their 
 course by a repellent force exerted by the reflecting body, 
 and then driven in the contrary direction by the same 
 force. 
 
 211. This repulsion is, however, selective. The reflect- 
 ing substance singles out one portion of the group of par- 
 ticles composing a luminous beam and drives them back ; 
 
 * Bennett, Phil Trans., 1792. 
 
THEORY OF UNDULATION. 59 
 
 but it attracts the remaining particles of the group and 
 transmits them. 
 
 212. When a light particle approaches a refractive 
 surface obliquely, if the particle be an attracted one, it is 
 drawn toward the surface, as an ordinary projectile is 
 drawn toward the earth. Refraction is thus accounted 
 for. Like the projectile, too, the velocity of the light par- 
 ticle is augmented during its deflection ; it enters the re- 
 fracting medium with this increased velocity, and once 
 within the medium, the attractions before and behind the 
 particle neutralizing each other, the increased velocity is 
 maintained. 
 
 213. Thus, it is an unavoidable consequence of the 
 theory of Newton, that the bending of a ray of light toward 
 the perpendicular is accompanied by an augmentation 
 of velocity that light in water moves more rapidly than 
 in air, in glass more rapidly than in water, in diamond 
 more rapidly than in glass. In short, that the higher the 
 refractive index, the greater the velocity of the light. 
 
 214. A decisive test of the emission theory was thus 
 suggested, and under that test the theory has broken 
 down. For it has been demonstrated, by the most rigid 
 experiments, that the velocity of light diminishes as the 
 index of refraction increases. The theory, however, had 
 yielded to the assaults made upon it long before this par- 
 ticular experiment was made. 
 
 Theory of Undulation. 
 
 215. The Emission Theory was first opposed by the 
 celebrated astronomer Huyghens, and the no less cele- 
 brated mathematician Euler, both of whom held that light, 
 like sound, was a product of wave-motion. Laplace, Malus, 
 Biot, and Brewster, supported Newton, and the emission 
 theory maintained its ground until it was finally over- 
 
60 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 thrown by the labors of Thomas Young * and Augustin 
 Fresnel. 
 
 216. These two eminent philosophers, while adducing 
 whole classes of facts inexplicable by the emission theory, 
 succeeded in establishing the most complete parallelism 
 between optical phenomena and those of wave-motion. 
 The justification of a theory consists in its exclusive com- 
 petence to account for phenomena. On such a basis the 
 
 Wave Theory , or the Undulatory Theory of light, now 
 rests, and every day's experience only makes its founda- 
 tions more secure. This theory must for the future 
 occupy much of our attention. 
 
 217. In the case of sound, the velocity depends upon 
 the relation of elasticity to density in the body which 
 transmits the sound. The greater the elasticity the greater 
 is the velocity, and the less the density the greater is the 
 velocity. To account for the enormous velocity of propa- 
 gation in the case of light, the substance which transmits 
 it is assumed to be of both extreme elasticity and of ex- 
 
 * Dr. Young was appointed Professor of Natural Philosophy in the 
 Royal Institution, August 3, 1801. From a marble slab in the village 
 church of Farnborough, near Bromley, Kent, I copied, on the llth of 
 April, the following inscription : 
 
 " Near this place are deposited the remains of THOMAS YOUNG, M. D., 
 Fellow and Foreign Secretary of the Royal Society, Member of the Na- 
 tional Institute of France. A man alike eminent in almost every depart- 
 ment of human learning, whose many discoveries enlarged the bounds of 
 Natural Science, and who first penetrated the obscurity which had veiled 
 for ages the Hieroglyphics of Egypt. 
 
 " Endeared to his friends by his domestic virtues, Honored by the 
 world for his unrivalled acquirements, He died in the hope of the resur- 
 rection of the just. 
 
 "Born at Milverton, in Somersetshire, June 13, 1773. 
 
 "Died in Park Square, London, May 29, 1820, 
 
 " In the 56th year of his age." 
 
THEORY OF UNDULATION. 61 
 
 trcme tenuity. This substance is called the Luminiferous 
 ether. 
 
 218. It fills space; it surrounds the atoms of bodies; 
 it extends, without solution of continuity, through the 
 humors of the eye. The molecules of luminous bodies are 
 in a state of vibration. The vibrations are taken up by 
 the ether, and transmitted through it in waves. These 
 waves impinging on the retina excite the sensation of 
 light. 
 
 219. In the case of sound, the air-particles oscillate to 
 and fro in the direction in which the sound is transmitted ; 
 in the case of light, the ether particles oscillate to and fro 
 across the direction in which the light is propagated. In 
 scientific language the vibrations of sound are longitudi- 
 nal, while the vibrations of light are transversal. In fact, 
 the mechanical properties of the ether are rather those of 
 a solid than of an air. 
 
 220. The intensity of the light depends on the distance 
 to which the ether particles move to and fro. This dis- 
 tance is called the amplitude of the vibration. The in- 
 tensity of light is proportional to the square of the ampli- 
 tude ; it is also proportional to the square of the maximum 
 velocity of the vibrating particle. 
 
 221. The amplitude of the vibrations diminishes simply 
 as the distance increases ; consequently the intensity, 
 which is expressed by the square of the amplitude, must 
 diminish inversely as the square of the distance. This, 
 in the language of the wave theory, is the law of inverse 
 squares. 
 
 222. The reflection of ether waves obeys the law es- 
 tablished in the case of light. The angle of incidence is 
 demonstrably equal to the angle of reflection. 
 
 223. To account for refraction, let us for the sake of 
 simplicity take a portion of a circular wave emitted by the 
 
62 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 sun or some other distant body. A short portion of such 
 a wave would be straight. Suppose it to impinge from 
 air upon a plate of glass, the wave being in the first in- 
 stance parallel to the surface of the glass. Such a wave 
 would go through the glass without change of direction. 
 
 224. But as the velocity in glass is less than the veloci- 
 ty in air, the wave would be retarded on passing into the 
 denser medium. 
 
 225. But suppose the wave, before impact, to be ob- 
 lique to the surface of the glass ; that end of the wave 
 which first reaches the glass will be first retarded, the 
 other portions being held back in succession. This retar- 
 dation of one end of the wave causes it to swing round ; 
 so that when the wave has fully entered the glass its course 
 is oblique to its first direction. It is refracted. 
 
 226. If the glass into which the wave enters be a plate 
 with parallel surfaces, the portion of the wave which 
 reached the upper surface first, and was first retarded, 
 will also reach its under surface first, and escape earliest 
 from the retarding medium. This produces a second 
 swinging round of the wave, by which its original direc- 
 tion is restored. In this simple way the Wave Theory 
 accounts for Refraction. 
 
 227. The convergence or divergence of beams of light 
 by lenses is immediately deduced from the fact that the 
 different points of the ether wave reach the lens, and are 
 retarded by the lens in succession, 
 
 228. The density of the ether is greater in liquids and 
 solids than in gases, and greater in gases than in vacuo. 
 A compressing force seems to be exerted on the ether by 
 the molecules of these bodies. Now if the elasticity of the 
 ether increased in the same proportion as its density, the 
 one would neutralize the other, and we should have no 
 retardation of the velocity of light. The diminished ve- 
 
THEORY OF UNDULATION. G3 
 
 locity in highly-refracting bodies is accounted for by as- 
 suming that in such bodies the elasticity in relation to the 
 density is less than in vacuo. The observed phenomena 
 immediately flow from this assumption. 
 
 229. The case is precisely similar to that of sound in a 
 gas or vapor which does not obey the law of Mariotte. 
 The elasticity of such a gas or vapor, when compressed, 
 increases less rapidly than the density ; hence the dimin- 
 ished velocity of the sound. 
 
 230. But we are able to give a more distinct statement 
 as to the influence which a refracting body has upon the 
 velocity of light. Regard the lines o m and np in Fig. 2, 
 Note 113. These two lines represent the velocities of light 
 in the two media there considered; or, expressed more 
 generally, the sine of the angle of incidence represents the 
 velocity of light in the first medium, while the sine of the 
 angle of refraction represents the velocity in the second. 
 The index of refraction then is nothing else than the ratio 
 of the two velocities. Thus in the case of water, where the 
 index of refraction is -f , the velocity in air is to its velocity 
 in water as 4 is to 3. In glass also, where the index of 
 refraction is f , the velocity in air is to the velocity in glass 
 as 3 is to 2. In other words the velocity of light in air 
 is H times its velocity in water, and 1 J times its velocity 
 in glass. The velocity of light in air is about 2 times its 
 velocity in diamond, and nearly three times its velocity in 
 chromate of lead, the most powerfully refracting sub- 
 stance hitherto discovered. Strictly speaking, the index 
 of refraction refers to the passage of a ray of light, not 
 from air, but from a vacuum,* into the refracting body. 
 Dividing the velocity of light in vacuo by its velocity in 
 the refracting substance, the quotient is the index of re- 
 fraction of that substance. 
 
 * That is to say, a vacuum save as regards the ether itself 
 
 \ 
 
64 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 231. In the wave theory, the rays of light are per- 
 pendiculars to the waves of ether. Unlike the icave, the 
 ray has no material existence ; it is merely a direction. 
 
 Prisms. 
 
 232. It has been stated, in Note 129, that in the case 
 of a plate of glass with parallel surfaces, the direction 
 possessed by an oblique ray, prior to its meeting the glass, 
 is restored when it quits the glass. This is not the case 
 if the two surfaces at which the ray enters and emerges 
 be not parallel. 
 
 233. When the ray passes through a wedge-shaped 
 transparent substance, in a direction perpendicular to the 
 edge of the wedge, it is permanently refracted. A body 
 of this shape is called a prism in optics, and the angle en- 
 closed by the two oblique sides of the wedge is called the 
 refracting angle. 
 
 234. The larger the refracting angle the greater is the 
 deflection of the ray from its original direction. But with 
 the self-same prism the amount of the refraction varies 
 with the direction pursued by the ray through the prism. 
 
 235. When that direction is such that the portion of 
 the ray within the prism makes equal angles with the two 
 sides of the prism, or, what is the same, with the ray be- 
 fore it reaches the prism and after it has quitted it, then 
 the total refraction is a minimum. This is capable both of 
 mathematical and experimental proof; and on this result 
 is based a method of determining the index of refraction. 
 
 236. The final direction of a refracted ray being un- 
 altered by its passage through glass plates with parallel 
 surfaces, we may employ hollow vessels composed of such 
 plates and filled with liquids, thus obtaining liquid 
 prisms. 
 
PRISMATIC ANALYSIS OF LIGHT; DISPERSION. G5 
 
 Prismatic Analysis of Light / Dispersion. 
 
 237. Newton first unravelled the solar light, proving 
 it to be composed of an infinite number of rays of different 
 degrees of refrangibility ; when such light is sent through 
 a prism, its constituent rays are' drawn asunder. This act 
 of drawing apart is called dispersion. 
 
 238. The waves of ether generated by luminous bodies 
 are not all of the same length ; some are longer than 
 others. In refracting substances the short waves are more 
 retarded than the longer ones ; hence the short waves are 
 more refracted than the long ones. This is the cause of 
 dispersion. 
 
 239. The luminous image formed when a beam of white 
 light is thus decomposed by a prism is called a spectrum. 
 If the light employed be that of the sun, the image is 
 called the solar spectrum. 
 
 240. The solar spectrum consists of a series of vivid 
 colors, which, when reblended, produce the original white 
 light. Commencing with that which is least refracted, 
 we have the following order of colors in the solar spec- 
 trum : Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Blue, Indigo, Violet. 
 
 241. The Color of Light is determined solely by its 
 Wave-length. The ether waves gradually diminish in 
 
 length from the red to the violet. The length of a wave 
 of red light is about Sa j 00 th of an inch ; that of the wave of 
 violet light is about g7 ^ 00 th of an inch. The waves which 
 produce the other colors of the spectrum lie between these 
 extremes. 
 
 242. The velocity of light being 192,000 miles in a 
 second, if we multiply this number by 39,000 we obtain 
 the number of waves of red light in 192,000 miles; the 
 product is 474,439,680,000,000. All these leaves enter the 
 eye in a second. In the same interval 699,000,000,000,000 
 
66 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 waves of violet light enter the eye. At this prodigious 
 rate is the retina hit by the waves of light. 
 
 243. Color, in fact, is to light what pitch is to sound. 
 The pitch of a note depends solely on the number of 
 aerial waves which strike the ear in a second. The color 
 of light depends on the number of ethereal waves which 
 strike the eye in a second. Thus the sensation of red is 
 produced by imparting to the optic nerve four hundred 
 and seventy-four millions of millions of impulses per 
 second, while the sensation of violet is produced by im- 
 parting to the nerve six hundred and ninety-nine millions 
 of millions of impulses per second. In the Emission 
 Theory numbers not less immense occur, " nor is there 
 any mode of conceiving the subject which does not call 
 upon us to admit the exertion of mechanical forces which 
 may well be termed infinite." * 
 
 Invisible Rays ; Calorescence and Fluorescence. 
 
 244. The spectrum extends in both directions beyond 
 its visible limits. Beyond the visible red we have rays 
 which possess a high heating power, though incompetent 
 to excite vision ; beyond the violet we have a vast body 
 of rays which, though feeble as regards heat, and power- 
 less as regards light, are of the highest importance be- 
 cause of their capacity to produce chemical action. 
 
 245. In the case of the electric light, the energy of the 
 non-luminous calorific rays emitted by the carbon points 
 is about eight times that of all the other rays taken to- 
 gether. The dark calorific rays of the sun also probably 
 exceed many times in power the luminous solar rays. It 
 is possible to sift the solar or the electric beam so as to 
 intercept the luminous rays, while the non-luminous ravs 
 are allowed free transmission. 
 
 * Sir John Herschel. 
 
INVISIBLE RAYS. 67 
 
 246. In this way perfectly dark foci may be obtained 
 where combustible bodies may be burned, non-refractory 
 metals fused, and refractory ones raised to the tempera- 
 ture of whiteness. The non-luminous calorific rays may 
 be thus transformed into luminous ones, which yield all 
 the colors of the spectrum. This passage, by the inter- 
 vention of a refractory body, from the non-luminous to the 
 luminous state, is called Calorescence. 
 
 247. So also as regards the ultra-violet rays; when 
 they are permitted to fall upon certain substances the 
 disulphate of quinine for example they render the sub- 
 stance luminous ; invisible rays are thereby rendered visi- 
 ble. The change here receives the name of Fluorescence. 
 
 248. In calorescence the atoms of the refractory body 
 are caused to vibrate more rapidly than the waves which 
 fall upon them ; the periods of the waves are quickened by 
 their impact on the atoms. The refrangibility of the rays 
 is, in fact, exalted. In fluorescence, on the contrary, the 
 impact of the waves throws the molecules of the fluores- 
 cent body into vibrations of slower periods than those 
 of the incident waves ; the refrangibility of the rays is 
 in fact lowered. Thus by exalting the refrangibility of 
 the ultra-red, and by lowering the refrangibility of the 
 ultra-violet rays, both classes of rays are rendered capable 
 of exciting vision. 
 
 249. Though the term is by no means faultless, those 
 rays, both ultra-red and ultra-violet, which are incom- 
 petent to excite vision, are called invisible rays. In 
 strictness we cannot speak of rays being either visible or 
 invisible ; it is not the rays themselves but the objects 
 they illuminate that become visible. " Space, though 
 travers'ed by the rays from all suns and all stars, is itself 
 unseen. Not even the ether which fills space, and whose 
 motions are the light of the world, is itself visible."* 
 
 * " Proceedings of the Royal Institution," vol. v., p. 456. 
 
68 NOTES 0$ LIGHT. 
 
 Doctrine of Visual Periods. 
 
 250. A string tuned to a certain note resounds when 
 that note is sounded. If you sing into an open piano, the 
 string whose note is in unison with your voice will be 
 thrown into sonorous vibration. If there be discord be- 
 tween the note and the string, there is no resonance, 
 however powerful the note may be. A particular church- 
 pane is sometimes broken by a particular organ-peal, 
 through the coincidence of its period of vibration with 
 that of the organ. 
 
 251. In this way it is conceivable that a feeble note, 
 through the coincidence of its periods of vibration with 
 those of a sounding body, may produce effects which a 
 powerful note, because of its non-coincidence, is unable to 
 produce. 
 
 252. This, which is a known phenomenon of sound, 
 helps us to a conception of the deportment of the retina 
 toward light. The retina, or rather the brain in which 
 its fibres end, is, as it were, attuned to a certain range of 
 vibrations, and it is dead to all vibrations which lie with- 
 out that range, however powerful they may be. 
 
 253. The quantity of wave-motion sent to the eye at 
 night, by a candle a mile distant, suffices to render the 
 candle visible. Employing the powerful ultra-red rays of 
 the sun, or of the electric light, it is demonstrable that 
 ethereal waves possessing many millions of times the me- 
 chanical energy of those which produce the candle's 
 light, may be caused to impinge upon the retina with- 
 out exciting any sensation whatever. The periods of 
 succession of the waves, rather than their strength, are 
 here influential. 
 
 254. When in music two notes are separated from each 
 other by an octave, the higher note vibrates witli twice 
 
DOCTRINE OF COLORS. 69 
 
 the rapidity of the lower. In Note 241 the lengths of the 
 wave of red light and of violet light are set down as -g-g^oir 
 of an inch and -^^nr of an inc k respectively ; but these 
 numbers refer to the mean red and the mean violet. The 
 waves of the extreme violet are about half the length of 
 those of the extreme red, and they strike the retina with 
 double the rapidity of the red. While, therefore, the music- 
 al scale, or the range of the ear, is known to embrace nearly 
 eleven octaves, the optical scale, or range of the eye, is 
 comprised within a single octave. 
 
 Doctrine of Colors. 
 
 255. Natural bodies possess the power of extinguish- 
 ing, or, as it is called, absorbing the light that enters them. 
 This power of absorption is selective, and hence, for the most 
 part, arise the phenomena of color. 
 
 256. When the light which enters a body is wholly 
 absorbed the body is black ; a body which absorbs all the 
 waves equally, but not totally, is gray ; while a body which 
 absorbs the various waves unequally is colored. Color is 
 due to the extinction of certain constituents of the white 
 light within the body, the remaining constituents which 
 return to the eye imparting to the body its color. 
 
 25*7. It is to be borne in mind that bodies of all colors, 
 illuminated by white light, reflect white light from their 
 exterior surfaces. It is the light which has plunged to a 
 certain depth within the body, which has been sifted there 
 by elective absorption, and then discharged from the body 
 by interior reflection that, in general, gives the body its 
 color. 
 
 258. A pure red glass interposed in the path of a beam 
 decomposed by a prism, either before or after the act of 
 decomposition, cuts off all the colors of the spectrum except 
 the red. A glass of any other pure color similarly inter- 
 
70 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 posed would cut off all the spectrum except that particular 
 portion which gives the glass its color. It is, however, 
 extremely difficult, if not impossible, to obtain pure pig- 
 ments of any kind. Thus a yellow glass not only allows 
 the yellow light of the spectrum to pass, but also a portion 
 of the adjacent green and orange ; while a blue glass not 
 only allows the blue to pass, but also a portion of the ad- 
 jacent green and indigo. 
 
 259. Hence, if a beam of white light be caused to pass 
 through a yellow glass and a blue glass at the same time, 
 the only transmissible color common to both is green. 
 This explains why blue and yellow powders, when mixed 
 together, produce green. The white light plunges into 
 the powder to a certain depth, and is discharged by inter- 
 nal reflection, minus its yellow and. its blue. The green 
 alone remains. 
 
 260. The effect is quite different when, instead of mix- 
 ing blue and yellow pigments, we mix blue and yellow 
 lights together. Here the mixture is a pure white. Blue 
 and yellow are complementary colors. 
 
 261. Any two colors whose mixture produces white are 
 called complementary colors. In the spectrum we have 
 the following pairs of such colors : 
 
 Red and greenish Blue. 
 Orange and cyanogen Blue. 
 Yellow and indigo Blue. 
 Greenish Yellow and Violet. 
 
 262. A body placed in a light which it is incompetent 
 to transmit appears black, however intense may be the 
 illumination. Thus, a stick of red sealing-wax, placed in 
 the vivid green of the spectrum, is perfectly black. A 
 bright-red solution similarly placed cannot be distinguished 
 from black ink ; and red cloth, on which the spectrum is 
 
CHROMATIC ABERRATION. ACHROMATISM. 71 
 
 permitted to fall, shows its color vividly where the red 
 light falls upon it, but appears black beyond this position. 
 
 263. We have thus far dealt with the analysis of white 
 light. In reblending the constituent colors, so as to pro- 
 duce the original, we illustrate, by synthesis, the composi- 
 tion of white light. 
 
 264. Let the beam analyzed be a rectangular slice of 
 light. By means of a cylindrical lens we can recombine 
 the colors, and produce by their mixture the original white. 
 It is also possible, by the combination of the colors of its 
 spectrum, to build up a perfect image of the source of light. 
 The persistence of impressions on the retina also offers a 
 ready means of blending colors. 
 
 Chromatic Aberration. Achromatism. 
 
 265. Owing to the different refrangibility of the differ- 
 ent rays of the spectrum, it is impossible by a single 
 spherical lens to bring them all to a focus at the same 
 point. The blue rays, for example, being more refracted 
 than the red will intersect sooner than the red. 
 
 266. Hence, when a divergent cone of white light is 
 rendered convergent by a lens, the convergent beam, as far 
 as the point of intersection of the rays, will be surrounded 
 by a sheath of red ; while beyond the focus the divergent 
 cone will be surrounded by a sheath of blue. Hence, when 
 the refracted rays fall upon a screen placed between the 
 lens and the focus of blue rays, a white circle with a red 
 border is obtained ; while if the screen be placed beyond 
 the focus of red rays, the white circle will have a blue 
 border. It is impossible to produce a colorless image in 
 these positions of the screen. 
 
 267. This lack of power on the part of a lens to bring its 
 differently-colored constituents to a common focus, is called 
 the Chromatic aberration of the lens. 
 
72 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 268. Newton considered it impossible to get rid of 
 chromatic aberration ; for he supposed the dispersion of a 
 prism or lens to be proportional to its refraction, and that 
 if you destroyed the one you destroyed the other. This, 
 however, was an error. 
 
 269. For two prisms producing the same mean refrac- 
 tion may produce very different degrees of dispersion. By 
 diminishing the angle of the more highly-dispersive prism 
 we can make its dispersion sensibly equal to that of the 
 feebly dispersive one ; and we can neutralize the colors of-, 
 both prisms by placing them in opposition to each other, 
 without neutralizing the refraction. 
 
 270. When, for example, a prism of water is opposed 
 to a prism of flint-glass, after the dispersion of the water, 
 which is small, has been destroyed, the beam is still re- 
 fracted. If a prism of crown-glass be substituted for the 
 prism of water, substantially the same effect is produced. 
 The flint-glass is competent to neutralize the dispersion of 
 the crown before it neutralizes the refraction. 
 
 271. What is here said of prisms applies equally to 
 lenses. A convex crown-glass lens, opposed to a concave 
 flint-glass lens, may have its dispersion destroyed, and still 
 images may be formed by the combination of the two 
 lenses, because of the residual refraction. 
 
 272. A combination of lenses wherein color is destroyed 
 while a certain amount of refraction is preserved, is called an 
 achromatic combination, or more briefly an achromatic lens. 
 
 273. The human eye is not achromatic. It suffers from 
 chromatic aberration as well as from spherical aberration. 
 
 Subjective Colors. 
 
 274. By the action of light the optic nerve is rendered 
 less sensitive. When we pass from bright daylight into a 
 moderately-lighted room, the room appears dark, 
 
SUBJECTIVE COLORS. 73 
 
 275. This is also true of individual colors; when light 
 of any particular color falls upon the eye, the optic nerve 
 is rendered less sensitive to that color. It is, in fact, par- 
 tially blinded to its perception. 
 
 276. If the eyes be steadily fixed upon a red wafer 
 placed on white paper, after a little time the wafer will be 
 surrounded by a greenish rim, and if the wafer be moved 
 away, the place on which it rested will appear green. 
 
 277. This is thus explained : the eye by looking at the 
 wafer has its sensibility to red light diminished ; hence, 
 when the wafer is removed, the white light falling upon 
 the spot of the retina on which the image of the wafer 
 rested, will have its red constituent virtually removed, and 
 will therefore appear of the complementary color. The 
 first rim of green light observed is due to the extension of 
 the red light of the wafer a little beyond its geometrical 
 image on the retina, in consequence of the spherical aberra- 
 tion of 'the eye. 
 
 278. Colored shadows are reducible to the same cause. 
 Let a strong red light, for example, fall upon a white screen. 
 A body interposed between the light and the screen will 
 cast a shadow, and if this shadow be moderately illumi- 
 nated by a second white light it will appear green. If the 
 original light be blue, the shadow will appear yellow ; if 
 the original light be green, the shadow will appear red. 
 The reason is, that the eye in the first instance is partially 
 blinded to the perception of the color cast upon the screen ; 
 hence the white light, which reaches the eye from the 
 shadow, will have that color partially withdrawn, and the 
 shadow will appear of the complementary color. 
 
 279. Colors of this kind are called subjective colors ; 
 they depend upon the condition of the eye, and do not ex- 
 press external facts of color. 
 
 4 
 
74 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 Spectrum Analysis. 
 
 280. Metals and their compounds impart to flames pe- 
 culiar colors, which are characteristic of the metals. Thus 
 the almost lightless flame t>f a Bunsen's burner is rendered 
 a brilliant yellow by the metal sodium, or by any vola- 
 tilizible compound of that metal, such as chloride of sodium 
 or common salt. The flame is rendered green by copper, 
 purple by zinc, and red by strontian. 
 
 281. These colors are due to the vapors of the metals 
 which are liberated in the flame. 
 
 282. When such incandescent metallic vapors are ex- 
 amined by the prism, it is found that instead of emitting 
 rays which form a continuous spectrum, one color passing 
 gradually into another, they emit distinct groups of rays 
 of definite, but different refrangibilities. The spectrum 
 corresponding to these rays is a series of colored bands, 
 separated from each other by intervals of darkness. Such 
 bands are characteristic of luminous gases of all kinds. 
 
 283. Thus the spectrum of incandescent sodium-vapor 
 consists of a brilliant band on the confines of the orange 
 and yellow ; and the vapor is incompetent to shed forth 
 any of the other light of the spectrum. When this band 
 is more accurately analyzed it resolves itself into two dis- 
 tinct bands ; greater delicacy of analysis resolves it into a 
 group of bands with fine dark intervals between them. 
 The spectrum of copper-vapor is signalized by a series of 
 green bands, while the incandescent vapor of zinc produces 
 brilliant bands of blue and red. 
 
 284. The light of the bands produced by metallic 
 vapors is very intense, the whole of the light being con- 
 centrated into a few narrow strips, and escaping in a great 
 measure the dilution due to dispersion. 
 
 285. These colored bands are perfectly characteristic 
 
FURTHER DEFINITION OF RADIATION, ETC. 75 
 
 of the vapor ; from their position and number the sub- 
 stance that produces them can be unerringly inferred. 
 
 286. If two or more metals be introduced into the 
 flame at the same time, prismatic analysis reveals the bands 
 of each metal as if the others were not there. This is also 
 true when a mineral containing several metals is intro- 
 duced into the flame. The constituent metals of the min- 
 eral will give each its characteristic bands. 
 
 287. Hence, having made ourselves acquainted with 
 the bands produced by all known metals, if entirely new 
 bands show themselves, it is a proof that an entirely new 
 metal is present in the flame. It is thus that Bunsen and 
 KirchhofF, the founders of spectrum analysis, discovered 
 Rubidium and Caesium ; and that Thallium, with its superb 
 green band, was discovered by Mr. Crookes. 
 
 288. The permanent gases when heated to a sufficient 
 temperature, as they may be by the electric discharge, 
 also exhibit characteristic bands in their spectra. By 
 these bands they may be recognized, even at stellar dis- 
 tances. 
 
 289. The action of light upon the eye is a test of un,- 
 rivalled delicacy. In specti*um analysis this action is 
 brought specially into play; hence the power of this 
 method of analysis.* 
 
 Further Definition of Radiation and Absorption. 
 
 290. The terms ray, radiation, and absorption, were 
 employed long prior to the views now entertained regard- 
 
 * Many persons are incompetent to distinguish one color of the spec- 
 trum from another ; red and green, for example, are often confounded. 
 Dalton, the celebrated founder of the Atomic Theory, could only distin- 
 guish by their form ripe red cherries from the green leaves of the tree. 
 This point is now attended to in the choice of engine-drivers, who have 
 to distinguish one colored signal from another. The defect is called 
 color-blindness, and sometimes Daltonism. 
 
76 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 ing the nature of light. It is necessary more clearly to 
 understand the meaning attached by the undulatory theory 
 to those terms. 
 
 291. And to complete our knowledge it is necessary to 
 know that all bodies, whether luminous or non-luminous, 
 are radiants ; if they do not radiate light they radiate 
 heat. 
 
 292. It is also necessary to know that luminous rays 
 are also heat rays ; that the self-same waves of ether falling 
 on a thermometer produce the effects of heat ; and im- 
 pinging upon the retina produce the sensation of light. 
 The rays of greatest heat, however, as already explained, 
 lie entirely without the visible spectrum. 
 
 293. The radiation both of light and heat consists in 
 the communication of motion from the vibrating atoms 
 of bodies to the ether which surrounds them. The ab- 
 sorption of heat consists in the acceptance of motion, on 
 the part of the atoms of a body, from ether which has been 
 already agitated by a source of light or heat. In radia- 
 tion, then, motion is yielded to the ether ; in absorption, 
 motion is received from the ether. 
 
 294. When a ray of light or of heat passes through a 
 body without loss ; in other words, when the waves are 
 transmitted through the ether which surrounds the atoms 
 of the body, without sensibly imparting motion to the 
 atoms themselves, the body is transparent. If motion be 
 in any degree transferred from the ether to the atoms, in 
 that degree is the body opaque. 
 
 295. If either light or radiant heat be absorbed, the 
 absorbing body is ic armed / if no absorption takes place, 
 the light or radiant heat, whatever its intensity may be, 
 passes through the body without affecting its tempera- 
 ture. 
 
 296. Thus in the dark foci referred to in Note 246, or 
 
THE PURE SPECTRUM: FRAUXHOFER'S LINES. 77 
 
 in the focus of the most powerful burning mirror which 
 concentrates the beams of the sun, the air might be of a 
 freezing temperature, because the absorption of the heat 
 by the air is insensible. A plate of clear rock-salt, more- 
 over, placed at the focus, is scarcely sensibly heated, the 
 absorption being small ; while a plate of glass is shivered, 
 and a plate of blackened platinum raised to a white heat, 
 or even fused, because of their powers of absorption. 
 
 297. It is here worth remarking that calculations of 
 the temperatures of comets, founded on their distances 
 from the sun> may be, and probably are, entirely fal- 
 lacious. The comet, even when nearest to the sun, might 
 be intensely cold. It might carry with it round its 
 perihelion the chill of the most distant regions of space. 
 If transparent to the solar rays it would be unaffected 
 by the solar heat, as long as that heat maintained the 
 radiant form. 
 
 The Pure Spectrum : Fraunhofer^ s Lines. 
 
 298. When a beam of white light issuing from a slit is 
 decomposed, the spectrum really consists of a series of 
 colored images of the slit placed side by side. If the slit 
 be wide, these images overlap but in a pure spectrum 
 the colors must not overlap each other. 
 
 299. A pure spectrum is obtained by making the slit 
 through which the decomposed beam passes very narrow, 
 and by sending the beam through several prisms in suc- 
 cession, thus augmenting the dispersion. 
 
 300. When the light of the sun is thus treated, the 
 solar spectrum is found to be not perfectly continuous ; 
 across it are drawn innumerable dark lines, the rays cor- 
 responding to which are absent. Dr. Wollaston was the 
 first to observe some of these lines. They were afterward 
 studied with supreme skill by Fraunhofer, who lettered 
 
78 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 them and made accurate maps of them, and from him they 
 have been called Fraunhofer^ s lines. 
 
 Reciprocity of Radiation and Absorption. 
 
 301. To account for the missing rays of the lines of 
 Fraunhofer was long an enigma with philosophers. By 
 the genius of Kirchhoff the enigma was solved. Its solu- 
 tion carried with it a new theory of the constitution of the 
 sun, and a demonstration of a method which enables us 
 to determine the chemical composition of the sun, the 
 stars, and the nebulae. The application of Kirchhoff's 
 principles by Messrs. Huggins, Miller, Secchi, Janssen, 
 and Lockyer, has been of especial interest and importance. 
 
 302. Kirchhoff's explanation of the lines of Fraunhofer 
 is based upon the principle that every body is specially 
 opaque to such rays as it can itself emit when rendered 
 incandescent. 
 
 303. Thus the radiation from a carbonic-oxide flame, 
 which contains carbonic acid at a high temparature, is in- 
 tercepted in an astonishing degree by carbonic acid. If 
 the rays from a sodium flame be sent through a second 
 sodium flame, they will be stopped with particular energy 
 by the second flame. The rays from incandescent thal- 
 lium vapor are intercepted by thallium vapor, those from 
 lithium vapor by lithium vapor, and so of the other 
 metals. 
 
 304. In the language of the undulatory theory, waves 
 of ether are absorbed with special energy their motion is 
 taken up with special facility by atoms whose periods of 
 vibration synchronize with the periods of the waves. This 
 is another way of stating that a body absorbs with special 
 energy the rays which it can itself emit. 
 
 305. If a beam of white light be sent through the in- 
 tensely yellow flame of sodium vapor, the yellow con- 
 
RECIPROCITY OF RADIATION AND ABSORPTION. 79 
 
 stituent of the beam is intercepted by the flame, while 
 rays of other refrangibilities are allowed free transmission. 
 
 306. Hence, when the spectrum of the electric light is 
 thrown upon a white screen, the introduction of a sodium 
 flame into the path of the rays cuts off the yellow compo- 
 nent of the light, and the spectrum is furrowed by a dark 
 band in place of the yellow. 
 
 307. Introducing other flames in the same manner in 
 the path of the beam, if the quantity of metallic vapor in 
 the flame be sufficient, each flame will cut out its own bands. 
 And if the flame through which the light passes contain 
 the vapors of several metals, we shall have the dark char- 
 acteristic bands of all of them upon the screen. 
 
 308. Expanding in idea our electric light until it forms 
 a globe equal to the sun in size, and wrapping round this 
 incandescent globe an atmosphere of flame, that atmos- 
 phere would cut off those rays of the globe which it can 
 itself emit, the interception of the rays being declared by 
 dark lines in the spectrum. 
 
 309. We thus arrive at a complete explanation of the 
 lines of Fraunhofer, and a new theory of the constitution 
 of the sun. The orb consists of a solid or molten nucleus, 
 in a condition of intense incandescence, but it is sur- 
 rounded by a gaseous photosphere containing vapors 
 which absorb those rays of the nucleus which they them- 
 selves emit. The lines of Fraunhofer are thus produced. 
 
 310. The lines of Fraunhofer are narrow bands of 
 partial darkness ; they are really illuminated by the light 
 of the gaseous envelope of the sun. But this is so feeble 
 in comparison with the light of the nucleus intercepted by 
 the envelope, that the bands appear dark in comparison 
 with the adjacent brilliance. 
 
 311. Were the central nucleus abolished, the bands 
 of Fraunhofer on a perfectly darlt ground would be trans- 
 
80 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 formed into a series of bright bands. These would re- 
 semble the spectra obtained from a flame charged with 
 metallic vapors. They would constitute the spectrum of 
 the solar atmosphere. 
 
 312. It is not necessary that the photosphere should 
 be composed of pure vapor. Doubtless it contains vast 
 masses of incandescent cloudy matter, composed of white 
 hot molten particles. These intensely luminous white hot 
 clouds may be the main origin of the light which the earth 
 receives from the sun, and with them the true vapor of the 
 photosphere may be more or less confusedly mingled. But 
 the vapor which produces the lines of Fraunhofer musjb 
 exist outside the clouds, as assumed by Kirchhoff. 
 
 Solar Chemistry. 
 
 313. From the dark bands of the spectrum we can de- 
 termine what substances enter into the composition of the 
 solar atmosphere. 
 
 314. One example will illustrate the possibility of this. 
 Lot the light from the sun and the light from incandes- 
 cent sodium vapor pass side by side through the same slit, 
 and be decomposed by the same prism. The solar light 
 will produce its spectrum, and the sodium light its yellow 
 band. This yellow band will coincide exactly in position 
 with a characteristic dark band of the solar spectrum, 
 which Fraunhofer distinguishes by the letter r>. 
 
 315. Were the solar nucleus absent, and did the va- 
 porous photosphere alone emit light, the dark line D would 
 be a bright one. Its character and position prove it to be 
 the light emitted by sodium. This metal, therefore, is 
 contained in the atmosphere of the sun.* 
 
 * By reference to note 283 it will be seen that the sodium line is 
 resolved by delicate analysis into a group of lines. The Fraunhofer 
 dark band D is similarly resolved. It ought to be mentioned that both 
 
PLANETARY CHEMISTRY. 81 
 
 316. The result is still more convincing when a metal 
 which gives a numerous series of bright bands finds each 
 of its bands exactly coincident with a dark band of the 
 solar spectrum. By this method Kirchhoff, to whom we 
 owe, in all its completeness, this splendid generalization, 
 established the existence of iron, calcium, magnesium, 
 sodium, chromium, and other metals, in the solar atmos- 
 phere ; and Mr. Huggins has extended the application of 
 the method to the light of the planets, fixed stars, and 
 nebulas.* 
 
 Planetary Chemistry. 
 
 317. The light reflected from the moon and planets is 
 solar light ; and, if unaffected by the planet's atmosphere, 
 the spectrum of the planet would show the same lines as 
 the solar spectrum. 
 
 318. The light of the moon shows no other lines. There 
 is no evidence of an atmosphere round the moon. 
 
 319. The lines in the spectrum of Jupiter indicate a 
 powerful absorption by the atmosphere of this planet. The 
 atmosphere of Jupiter contains some of the gases or vapors 
 present in the earth's atmosphere. Feeble lines, some of 
 them identical with those of Jupiter, occur in the spectrum 
 of Saturn. 
 
 320. The lines characterizing the atmospheres of Jupiter 
 and Saturn are not present in the spectrum of Mars. The 
 blue portion of the spectrum is mainly the seat of absorp- 
 tion ; and this, by giving predominance to the red rays, 
 may be the cause of the red color of Mars. 
 
 321. All the stronger lines of the solar spectrum are 
 found in the spectrum of Venus, but no additional lines. 
 
 Mr. Talbot and Sir John Herschel clearly foresaw the possibility of em- 
 ploying spectrum analysis in detecting minute traces of bodies. 
 
 * Prof. Stokes foresaw the possible application of spectrum analysis 
 to solar chemistry. 
 
82 NOTES OX LIGHT. 
 
 Stellar Chemistry. 
 
 822. The atmosphere of the star Aldebaran contains 
 hydrogen, sodium, magnesium, calcium, iron, bismuth, 
 tellurium, antimony, mercury. The atmosphere of the star 
 Alpha in Orion contains sodium, magnesium, calcium, 
 iron, and bismuth. 
 
 323. No star sufficiently bright to give a spectrum has 
 been observed to be without lines. Star differs from star 
 only in the grouping and arrangement of the numerous 
 fine lines by which their spectra are crossed. 
 
 324. The dark absorption lines are strongest in the 
 spectra of yellow and red stars. In white stars the lines, 
 though equally numerous, are very poor and faint. 
 
 325. A comparison of the spectra of stars of different 
 colors suggests that the colors of the stars may be due to 
 the action of their atmospheres. Those constituents of the 
 white light of the star on which the lines of absorption fall 
 thickest are subdued, the star being tinted by the residual 
 color. 
 
 Father Secchi, of Rome, has studied the light of many 
 hundreds of stars, and has divided them into four classes. 
 
 Nebular Chemistry. 
 
 326. Some nebula3 give spectra of bright bands, others 
 give continuous spectra. The light from the former ema- 
 nates from intensely heated matter existing in a state of 
 gas. This may in part account for the weakness of the 
 light of these nebula?. 
 
 327. It is probable that two of the constituents of the 
 gaseous nebulae are hydrogen and nitrogen. 
 
 The Red Prominences and Envelope of the Sun. 
 
 328. Astronomers had observed during total eclipses 
 of the sun vast red prominences extending from the solar 
 
THE RED PROMINENCES OF THE SUN. 83 
 
 . limb many thousand miles into space. The intense illumi- 
 nation of the circumsolar region of our atmosphere masks, 
 under ordinary circumstances, the red prominences. They 
 are quenched, as it were, by excess of light. 
 
 329. But when, by the intervention of the dark body 
 of the moon, this light is cut off, the prominences are dis- 
 tinctly seen. 
 
 330. It was proved by Mr. De la Hue and others 
 that the red matter of the prominences was wrapped round 
 a large portion of the sun's surface. According to the 
 observations of Mr. Lockyer, the red matter forms a com- 
 plete envelope round the sun. 
 
 331. Examined by the spectroscope the matter of the 
 prominences shows itself to be, for the most part, incan- 
 descent hydrogen. With it are mixed the vapors of sodium 
 and magnesium. 
 
 332. Mr. Janssen, in India, and Mr. Lockyer subse- 
 quently, but independently, in England, proved that the 
 bright bands of the prominences might be seen without 
 the aid of a total eclipse. The explanation of this dis- 
 covery is glanced at in Note 284, where the intensity of 
 the bright bands of incandescent gases was referred to the 
 practical absence of dispersion. 
 
 333. By sending the light, which under ordinary cir- 
 cumstances masks the hydrogen bands, through a sufficient 
 number of prisms, it may be dispersed, and thereby en- 
 feebled in any required degree. When sufficiently en- 
 feebled the undispersed light of the incandescent hydrogen 
 dominates over that of the continuous spectrum. By going 
 completely round the periphery of the sun Mr. Lockyer 
 found this hydrogen atmosphere everywhere present, its 
 depth, generally about 5,000 miles, being indicated by the 
 length of its characteristic bright lines. Where the 
 hydrogen ocean is shallow, the bright bands are short ; 
 
 
 J^ 
 
84 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 where the prominences rise like vast waves above the level 
 of the ocean, the bright lines are long. The prominences 
 sometimes reach a height of 70,000 miles. 
 
 The Rainbow. 
 
 334. A beam of solar light, falling obliquely on the 
 surface of a rain-drop, is refracted on entering the drop ; 
 it is in part reflected at the back of the drop, and on 
 emerging from the drop it is again refracted. 
 
 335. By these two refractions on entrance and on 
 emergence the beam of light is decomposed, and it quits 
 the drop resolved into its colored constituents. It is re- 
 ceived by the eye of an observer who faces the drop and 
 turns his back to the sun. 
 
 336. In general the solar rays, when they quit the drop, 
 are divergent, and therefore produce but a feeble effect 
 upon the eye. But at one particular angle the rays, after 
 having been twice refracted and once reflected, issue from 
 the drop almost perfectly parallel. They thus preserve 
 their intensity like rays reflected from a parabolic mirror, 
 and produce a corresponding effect upon the eye. The 
 angle at which this parallelism is established varies with 
 the refrangibility of the light. 
 
 337. Draw a line from the sun to the observer's eye 
 and prolong this line beyond the observer. Conceive an- 
 other line drawn from the eye enclosing an angle of 42 
 30' with the line drawn to the sun. The rain-drop struck 
 by this second line will send to the eye a parallel beam of 
 red light. Every other drop similarly situated, that is to 
 say, every drop at an angular distance of 42 30' from the 
 line drawn to the sun, will do the same. We thus obtain 
 a circular hand of red light, forming part of the base of a 
 cone, by which the eye of the observer is the apex. Because 
 
THE RAINBOW. 85 
 
 of the angular magnitude of the sun the width of this band 
 will be half a degree. 
 
 338. From the eye of the observer conceive another 
 line to be drawn enclosing an angle of 40 30' with the line 
 drawn to the sun. A drop struck by this line will send 
 along the line an almost perfectly parallel beam of violet 
 light to the eye. All drops at the same angular distance 
 will do the same, and we shall obtain a band of violet 
 light of the same width as the red. These two bands con- 
 stitute the limiting colors of the rainbow, and between 
 them the bands corresponding to the other colors lie. 
 
 339. The rainbow is in fact a spectrum, in which the 
 rain-drops play the part of prisms. The width of the bow 
 from red to violet is about two degrees. The size of the 
 arc visible at any time manifestly depends upon the posi- 
 tion of the sun. The bow is grandest when it is formed 
 by the rising or the setting sun. An entire semicircle is 
 then seen by an observer on a plain, while from a mountain- 
 top a still greater arc is visible. 
 
 340. The angular distances and the order of colors here 
 given correspond to the primary bow, but in addition to 
 this we usually see a secondary bow of weaker hues, and 
 in which the order of the colors is that of the primary in- 
 verted. In the primary the red band forms the convex 
 surface of the arch ; it is the largest band ; in the second- 
 ary the violet band is outside, the red forming the con- 
 cavity of the bow. 
 
 341. The secondary bow is produced by rays which 
 have undergone two reflections within the drop, as well as 
 two refractions at its surface. It is this double internal 
 reflection that weakens the color. In the primary bow the 
 incident rays strike the upper hemisphere of the drop, and 
 emerge from the lower one ; in the secondary bow the in- 
 cident rays strike the lower hemisphere of the drop, emerge 
 
86 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 from the upper one, and then cross the incident rays to 
 reach the eye of the observer. The secondary bow is 3^ 
 degrees wide, and it is 7 1 degrees higher than the primary. 
 From the space between the two bows part of the light 
 reflected from the anterior surfaces of the rain-drops 
 reaches the eye ; but no light whatever that enters the 
 rain-drops in this space is reflected to the eye. Hence this 
 region of the falling shower is darkest. 
 
 Interference of Light. 
 
 342. In wave-motion we must clearly distinguish the 
 motion of the wave from, the motion of the individual par- 
 ticles which at any moment constitute the wave. For 
 while the wave moves forward through great distances, 
 the individual particles of water concerned in its propaga- 
 tion perform a comparatively short excursion to and fro. 
 A sea-fowl, for example, as the waves pass it, is not car- 
 ried forward, but moves up and down.* 
 
 343. Here, as in other cases, the distance through 
 which the individual water" particles oscillate, or through 
 which the fowl moves vertically up and down, is called 
 the amplitude of the oscillation. 
 
 344. When light from, two different sources passes 
 through the same ether, the waves from the one source 
 must be more or less affected by the waves from the other. 
 This action is most easily illustrated by reference to water- 
 waves. 
 
 345. Let two stones be cast at the same moment into 
 still water. Round each of them will spread a series of 
 circular waves. Let us fix our attention on a point A in 
 the water, equally distant from the two centres of disturb- 
 ance. The first two crests of both systems of waves reach 
 
 -_.- '* Strictly speaking, the water particles .describe closed curves, and not 
 straight vertical lines. 
 
INTERFERENCE OF LIGHT. 87 
 
 this point at the same moment, and it is lifted by their 
 joint action to twice the height that it would attain through 
 the action of either wave taken singly. 
 
 346. The first depression, or sinus as it is called, of the 
 one system of waves also reaches the point A at the same 
 moment as the first sinus of the other, and through their 
 joint action the point is depressed to twice the depth that 
 it would attain l)y the action of either sinus taken singly. 
 
 347. What is true of the first crest and the first de- 
 pression is also true of all the succeeding ones. At the 
 point A the successive crests will coincide, and the suc- 
 cessive depressions will coincide, the agitation of the point 
 being twice what it would be if acted upon by one only of 
 the systems of waves. 
 
 348. The length of a wave is the distance from any 
 crest, or any sinus, to the crest or sinus next preceding or 
 succeeding. In the case of the two stones dropped at the 
 same moment into still water, it is manifest that the coin- 
 cidence of crest with crest and of sinus with sinus would 
 also take place if the distance from the one stone to the 
 point A exceeded the distance of the other stone from the 
 same point by a whole wave-length. The only difference 
 would be, that the second wave of the nearest stone would 
 then coincide with the first wave of the most distant one. 
 The one system of waves would here be retarded a whole 
 wave-length behind the other system. 
 
 349. A little reflection will also make it clear that 
 coincidence of crest with crest and of sinus with sinus will 
 also occur at the point A when the retardation of the one 
 system behind the other amounts to any number of ichole 
 wave-lengths. 
 
 350. But if we suppose the point A to be half a wave- 
 length more distant from the one stone than from the 
 other, then as the waves pass the point A the crests of one 
 
88 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 of the systems will always coincide with the sinuses of the 
 other. When a wave of the one system tends to elevate 
 the point A, a wave from the other system will, at the 
 same moment, tend to depress it. As a consequence the 
 point will neither rise nor sink, as it would do if acted 
 upon by either system of waves taken singly. The same 
 neutralization of motion occurs where the difference of path 
 between the two stones and the point A amounts to any 
 odd number of half wave-lengths. 
 
 351. Here, then, by adding motion to motion, we abolish 
 motion and produce rest. In precisely the same way we 
 can, by adding sound to sound, produce silence, one sys- 
 tem of sound-waves being caused to neutralize another. 
 So also by adding heat to heat we can produce cold, while 
 by adding light to light we can produce darkness. It is 
 this perfect identity of the deportment of light and radiant 
 heat with the phenomena of wave-motion that constitutes 
 the strength of tlie Theory of Undulation. 
 
 352. This action of one system of waves upon another, 
 whereby the oscillatory motion is either augmented or 
 diminished, is called Interference. In relation to optical 
 phenomena it is called the Interference of Light. We 
 shall henceforth have frequent occasion to apply this 
 principle. 
 
 Diffraction, or the Inflection of Light. 
 
 353. Newton, who was familiar with the idea of an 
 ether, and indeed introduced it in some of his specula- 
 tions, objected that if light were propagated by waves, 
 shadows could not exist ; for that the waves would bend 
 round opaque bodies, and abolish the shadows behind 
 them. According to the wave theory this bending round 
 of the w r aves actually occurs, but the different portions 
 
DIFFRACTION, OR THE INFLECTION OF LIGHT. 9 
 
 of the inflected waves destroy each other 'by their inter- 
 ference. 
 
 354. This bending of the waves of light round the edges 
 of opaque bodies, receives the name of Diffraction or In- 
 flection (German, Beugung). We have now to consiclef 
 some of the effects of diffraction. 
 
 355. And for this purpose it is necessary that our source 
 of light should be a physical point or a fine line : for when 
 an extensive luminous surface is employed, the effects of 
 its different points in diffraction phenomena neutralize 
 each other. 
 
 356. A. point of light may be obtained by converging, 
 by a lens of short focus, the parallel rays of the sun, 
 admitted through a small aperture into a dark room. 
 The small image of the sun formed at the focus is here 
 our luminous point. The image of the sun formed on the 
 surface of a silvered bead, or indeed upon the convex fur- 
 face of a glass lens, or of a watch-glass blackened within, 
 also answers the purpose. 
 
 357. A line of light is obtained by admitting the sun- 
 light through a slit, and sending the slice of light through 
 a cylindrical lens. The rectangular beam is contracted 
 to a physical line at the focus of the lens. A glass tube 
 blackened within and placed in the light, reflects from its 
 surface a luminous line which also answers the purpose. 
 For many experiments, indeed, the circular aperture, or 
 the slit itself, suffices without any condensation by a 
 lens. 
 
 358. In the experiment now to be described, a slit of 
 variable width is placed in front of the electric lamp, and 
 this slit is looked at from a distance through another slit, 
 also of variable aperture. The light of the lamp is ren- 
 dered monochromatic by placing a pure red glass in front 
 of the slit. 
 
90 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 359. With the eye placed in the straight line drawn 
 through both slits from the incandescent carbon points of 
 the electric lamp an extraordinary appearance is observed. 
 Firstly, the slit in front of the lamp is seen as a vivid 
 rectangle of light ; but right and left of it is a long series 
 of rectangles, decreasing in vividness, and separated from 
 each other by intervals of absolute darkness. 
 
 360. The breadth of the bands varies with the width 
 of the slit placed in front of the eye. If the slit be widened, 
 the images become narrower, and crowd more closely to- 
 gether; if the slit be narrowed, the images widen and 
 retreat from each other. 
 
 361. It may be proved that the width of the bands is 
 inversely proportional to the width of the slit held in front 
 of the eye. 
 
 362. Leaving every thing else unchanged, let a blue 
 glass or a solution of ammonia sulphate of copper, which 
 gives a very pure blue, be placed in the path of the light. 
 A series of blue bands is thus obtained, exactly like the 
 former in all respects save one; the blue rectangles are 
 narrower^ and they are closer together, than the red ones. 
 
 363. If we employ colors of intermediate refrangibili- 
 ties between red and blue, which we may do by causing 
 the different colors of a spectrum to shine through the slit, 
 we should obtain bands of color intermediate in width and 
 occupying intermediate positions between those of the red 
 and blue. Hence when white light passes through the slit 
 the various colors are not superposed, and instead of a 
 series of monochromatic bands, separated from each other 
 by intervals of darkness, we have a series of colored spec- 
 tra placed side by side, the most refrangible color of each 
 spectrum being nearest to the slit. 
 
 364. When the slit in front of the camera is illuminated 
 by a candle-flame, instead of the more intense electric light, 
 
DIFFRACTION, OR THE INFLECTION OF LIGHT. 01 
 
 substantially the same effects, though less brilliant, are 
 observed. 
 
 365. What is the meaning of this experiment, and how 
 are the lateral images of the slit produced ? Of these and 
 certain accompanying results the emission theory is in- 
 competent to offer any explanation. Let us see how they 
 are accounted for by the theory of undulation. 
 
 366. For the sake of simplicity, we will consider the 
 case of monochromatic light. Conceive a wave of ether 
 advancing from the first slit toward the second, and finally 
 filling the second slit. When the wave passes through 
 the latter it not only pursues its direct course to the 
 retina, but diverges right and left, tending to throw into 
 motion the entire mass of the ether behind the slit. In 
 fact, every point of the wave which Jills the slit is itself a 
 centre of new wave-systems, which are transmitted in all 
 directions through the ether behind the slit. We have 
 now to examine how these secondary waves act upon each 
 other. 
 
 367. First, let us regard the central rectangle of the 
 series. It is manifest that the different parts of every 
 transverse section of the wave, which in this case fills our 
 slit, reach the retina at the same moment. They are in 
 complete accordance, for no one portion is retarded in 
 reference to any other portion. The rays thus coming 
 direct from the source through the slit to the retina pro- 
 duce the central band of the series. 
 
 368. But now let us consider those waves which diverse 
 
 O 
 
 obliquely from the slit. In this case, the waves from the 
 two edges of the slit have, in order to reach the retina, to 
 pass over unequal distances. Let us suppose the differ- 
 ence in path of the two marginal rays to be a whole wave- 
 length of the red light ; how must this difference affect the 
 final illumination of the retina ? 
 
92 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 369. Fix your attention upon the particular ray or line 
 of light that passes exactly through the centre of the slit to 
 the retina. The difference of path between this central 
 ray and the two marginal rays is, in the case here sup- 
 posed, half a wave-length. The least reflection will make 
 it clear that every ray on the one side of the central liue 
 finds a ray upon the other side, from which its path differs 
 by half an undulation, with which, therefore, it is in com- 
 plete discordance. The consequence is that the light on 
 the one side of the central line will completely abolish the 
 light on the other side of that line, absolute darkness be- 
 ing the result of their mutual extinction. The first darJc 
 interval of our series of bands is thus accounted for. It 
 is produced by an obliquity which causes the paths of the 
 marginal rays to be a whole wave-length different from 
 each other. 
 
 370. When the difference between the paths of the 
 marginal rays is half a wave-length^ a partial destruction 
 of the light is effected. The luminous intensity corre- 
 sponding to this obliquity is a little less than one-half 
 accurately 0.4 of that of the undiffracted light. 
 
 371. If the paths of the marginal rays be three semi-\ 
 undulations different from each other, and if the whole 
 beam be divided into three equal parts, two of these parts 
 will completely neutralize each other, the third only being 
 effective. Corresponding, therefore, to an obliquity which 
 produces a difference of three semi-undulations in the 
 marginal rays, we have a luminous band, but one of 
 considerably less intensity than the undiffracted central 
 band. 
 
 372. With a marginal difference of path of four semi- 
 undulations we have a second extinction of the entire 
 beam, a space of absolute darkness corresponding to this 
 obliquity. In this way we might proceed further, the 
 
MEASUREMENT OF THE WAVES OF LIGHT. 93 
 
 general result being that, whenever the obliquity is such 
 as to produce a marginal difference of path of an even 
 number of semi-undulations, we have complete extinction ; 
 while, when the marginal difference is an odd number of 
 semi-undulations, we have only partial extinction, a por- 
 tion of the beam remaining as a luminous band. 
 
 373. A moment's reflection will make it plain that the 
 shorter the wave, the less will be the obliquity required 
 to produce the necessary retardation. The maxima and 
 minima of blue light must, therefore, fall nearer to the 
 centre than the maxima and minima of red light. The 
 maxima and minima of the other colors fall between these 
 extremes. In this simple way the undulatory theory com- 
 pletely accounts for the extraordinary appearance referred 
 to in Note 359. When a slit and telescope are used, in- 
 stead of the slit and naked eye, the effects are magnified 
 and rendered more brilliant. 
 
 Measurement of the Waves of Light. 
 
 374. We are now in a condition to solve the im- 
 portant problem of measuring the length of a wave of 
 light. 
 
 375. The first of our dark bands corresponds, as al- 
 ready explained, to a difference of marginal path of one 
 undulation ; our second dark band to a difference of path 
 of two undulations ; our third dark band to a difference 
 of three undulations, and so forth. With a slit 1.35 * mil- 
 limetre wide, Schwerd found the angular distance of the 
 first dark band from the centre of the field to be 1' 38". 
 The angular distances of the other dark bands are twice, 
 three times, four times, etc., this quantity, that is to say, 
 they are in arithmetical progression. 
 
 376. Draw a diagram of the slit EC with the beam 
 
 * The millimetre is about ^ of an inch. 
 
94 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 passing through it at the obliquity corresponding to the 
 first dark band. Let fall a perpendicular from one edge, 
 E, of the slit on the marginal ray of the other edge at d. 
 The distance, c d, between the foot of this perpendicular 
 and the other ectge is the length of the wave of light. 
 From the centre E, with the width E c as radius, suppose 
 a semicircle to be described ; its radius being 1.35, the 
 length of this semicircle is readily found to be 4.248 milli- 
 metres. Now, the length of this semicircle is to the length 
 cdof the wave as 180 to 1' 38", or as 648,000* to 98". 
 Thus we have the proportion 
 
 648,000 : 98 :: 4.248 to the wave-length cd* 
 
 Making the calculation, we find the wave-length for this 
 particular kind of light (red), to be 0.000643 of a milli- 
 metre, or 0.000026 of an inch. 
 
 377. Instead of receiving them directly upon the retina, 
 the colored fringes may be received upon a screen. In this 
 case it is desirable to employ a lens of considerable con- 
 vergent power to bring the beam from the first slit to a 
 focus, and to place the second slit or other diffracting edge 
 or edges between the focus and the screen. The light in 
 this case virtually emanates from the focus. 
 
 378. If the edge of a knife be placed in the beam paral? 
 lei to the slit, the shadow of the edge upon the screen will 
 be bounded by a series of parallel colored fringes. If the 
 light be monochromatic the bands will be simply bright 
 and dark. The back of the knife produces the same effect 
 as its edge. A wooden or an ivory paper-knife produces 
 precisely the same effect as a steel knife. The fringes are 
 absolutely independent of the character of the substance 
 round the edge of which the light is diffracted. 
 
 * C d is so minute that it practically coincides with the circle drawn 
 round E. 
 
MEASUREMENT OF THE WAVES OF LIGHT. 95 
 
 379. A thick wire placed in the beam lias colored 
 fringes on each side of its shadow. If the wire be Jine, or 
 if a human hair be employed, the geometric shadow itself 
 will be found occupied by parallel stripes. The former are 
 called the exterior fringes, the latter the interior fringes. 
 In the hands of Young and Fresnel all these phenomena 
 received their explanation as effects of interference. 
 
 380. A slit consists of two edges facing each other. 
 When a slit is placed in the beam between the focus and 
 the screen, the space between the edges is occupied by 
 stripes of color. 
 
 381. Looking at a distant point of light through a small 
 circular aperture the point is seen encircled by a series of 
 colored bands. If monochromatic light be used these bands 
 are simply bright and dark, but with white light the circles 
 display iris-colors. 
 
 382. These results are capable of endless variation by 
 varying the size, shape, and number of the apertures 
 through which the point of light is observed. The street 
 lamps at night, looked at through the meshes of a hand- 
 kerchief, show diffraction phenomena. The diffraction 
 effects obtained by Schwerd in looking through a bird's 
 feathers are very gorgeous. The iridescence of Alpine 
 clouds is also, an effect of diffraction.* 
 
 * This may be imitated by the spores of Lycopodium. The diffrac- 
 tion phenomena of " actinic clouds " are exceedingly splendid. One of 
 the most interesting cases of diffraction by small particles that ever came 
 before me was that of an artist whose vision was disturbed by vividly- 
 colored circles. When he came to me he was in great dread of losing 
 his sight ; assigning as a cause of his increased fear that the circles were 
 becoming larger and the colors more vivid. I ascribed the colors to 
 minute particles in the humors of the eye, and encouraged him by the 
 assurance that the increase of size and vividness indicated that the dif- 
 fracting particles were becoming smaller, and that they might finally be 
 altogether absorbed. The prediction was verified. It is needless to say 
 
96 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 383. Following out the indications of theory, Poisson 
 was led to the paradoxical result that in the case of an 
 opaque circular disk the illumination of the centre of the 
 shadow, caused by diffraction at the edge of the disk, is 
 precisely the same as if the disk were altogether absent. 
 This startling consequence of theory was afterward veri- 
 fied experimentally by Arago. 
 
 Colors of Thin Plates. 
 
 284. When a beam of monochromatic light say of 
 pure red, which is most easily obtained by absorption 
 falls upon a thin, transparent film, a portion of the light is 
 reflected at the first surface of the film ; a portion enters 
 the film, and is in part reflected at the second surface. 
 
 385. This second portion having crossed the film to and 
 fro is retarded with reference to the light first reflected. 
 The case resembles that of our two stones" dropped into 
 still water at unequal distances from the point A (Note 
 345). 
 
 386. If the thickness of the film be such .as to retard 
 the beam reflected from the second surface a whole wave- 
 length, or any number of whole wave-lengths or, in other 
 words, any even number of half wave-lengths the two 
 reflected beams, travelling through the same ether, will be 
 in complete accordance / they will therefore support each 
 other, and make the film appear brighter than either of 
 them would do taken singly. 
 
 387. But if the thickness of the film be such as to retard 
 the beam reflected from the second surface half a wave- 
 length, or any odd number of half- wave lengths, the two 
 reflected beams will^c in complete discordance / and a 
 destruction of light will follow. By the addition of light 
 
 one word on the necessity of optical knowledge in the case of the prac- 
 ticat oculist. 
 
COLORS OF THIN PLATES. 97 
 
 which has undergone more than one reflection at the second 
 surface to the light which has undergone only one reflec- 
 tion, the" beam reflected from the first surface may be 
 totally destroyed. Where this total destruction of light 
 occurs the film appears black. 
 
 388. If the film be of variable thickness, its various 
 parts will appear bright or dark, according as the thick- 
 ness favors the accordance or discordance of the reflected 
 rays. 
 
 389. Because of the different lengths of the waves of 
 light, the different colors of the spectrum require different 
 thicknesses to produce accordance and discordance ; the 
 longer the waves, the greater must be the thickness of the 
 film. Hence those thicknesses which effect the extinction 
 of one color will not effect the extinction of another. 
 When, therefore, a film of variable thickness is illuminated 
 by white light, it displays a variety of colors. 
 
 390. These colors are called the colors of thin plates. 
 
 391. The colors of the soap-bubble; of oil or tar upon 
 water ; of tempered steel ; the brilliant colors of lead skim- 
 mings ; ISTobili's metallo-chrome ; the flashing colors of 
 certain insects' wings, are all colors of thin plates. The 
 colors are produced by transparent films of all kinds. In 
 the bodies of crystals we often see iridescent colors due to 
 vacuous films produced by internal fracture. In cutting 
 the dark ice under the moraines of glaciers internal frac- 
 ture often occurs, and the colors of thin plates flash forth 
 from the body of the ice with extraordinary brilliancy. 
 
 392. Newton placed a lens of small curvature in optical 
 contact with a plane surface of glass. Between the lens 
 and the surface he had a film of air, which gradually aug- 
 mented in thickness from the point of contact outward. 
 He thus obtained in monochromatic light a series of 
 bright and dark rings, corresponding to the different thick- 
 
 5 
 
98 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 nesses of the film of air, which produced alternate accord- 
 ance and discordance. 
 
 393. The rings produced by violet he found to be 
 smaller than those produced by red, while the rings pro- 
 duced by the other colors fell between these extremes. 
 Hence when white light is employed, " Newton's Rings " 
 appear as a succession of circular bands of color. A far 
 greater number of the rings is visible in monochromatic 
 than in white light, because the differently-colored rings, 
 after a certain thickness of film has been attained, become 
 superposed and reblended to form white light. 
 
 394. Newton, considering the means at his disposal, 
 measured the diameters of his rings with marvellous 
 accuracy ; he also determined from its focal length and its 
 refractive index the diameter of the sphere of which his 
 lens formed a part. He found the squares of the diameters 
 of his rings to be in arithmetical progression, and conse- 
 quently that the thicknesses of the film of air correspond- 
 ing to the diameters of the rings were also in arithmetical 
 progression. 
 
 395. He determined the absolute thicknesses of the 
 plates of air at which the rings were formed. Employing 
 the most luminous rays of the spectrum, that is, the rays at 
 the common boundary of the yellow and orange, he found 
 the thickness corresponding to the first bright ring to be 
 __V<nr of an inch. 
 
 396. The entire series of bright rings were formed at 
 the following successive thicknesses : 
 
 TTsWir tnftrjnri TtArhn inAooj etc -i 
 and the series of dark rings, separating the bright ones, at 
 the thicknesses 
 
 '1 f SO'OO) 1180005 TT8 UTTF5 n 8 6 * C ' 
 
 397. To account for the rings, Newton assumed that 
 the light particles were endowed withes of easy transmis- 
 
COLORS OF THIN PLATES. 99 
 
 sion and of easy reflection. He probably figured those 
 particles as endowed at the same time with a motion of 
 translation through space, and a motion of rotation round 
 their own axes. If we suppose such particles to resemble 
 little magnets which present alternately attractive and 
 repulsive poles to the surface which they approach, we 
 have a conception in conformity w T ith the notion of New- 
 ton. 
 
 398. According to this conception ordinary reflection 
 and refraction would depend upon the presentation of the 
 repulsive or the attractive poles of the particles to the 
 reflecting or refracting surface. 
 
 399. Figure then the rotating light particles entering 
 the film of air between Newton's lens and plate. If the 
 distance between both be such as to enable the light 
 particle to perform a complete rotation, it will present at 
 the second surface of the film of air the same pole that* it 
 presented at the first. It will therefore be transmitted, 
 and will not return to the eye. 
 
 400. This effect would also take place if the distance 
 between the plate and lens were such as to enable the light 
 particle to perform two, three, four, etc., complete rota- 
 tions. The dark rings of Newton were thus accounted for. 
 They occurred at places where the light particles, instead 
 of being sent back to the eye from the second surface of 
 the film, were transmitted through that surface. 
 
 401. But if the thickness of the film be such as to allow 
 the light particle which has entered the first surface to 
 perform only half a rotation before it arrives at the second 
 surface ; then a repulsive pole will be presented to the 
 latter, and the particle will be driven back to the eye. 
 The same will occur if the distance be such as to enable 
 the light particle to perform three, or five, or seven, etc., 
 semi-rotations. The bright rings of Newton were thus 
 
100 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 accounted for they occurred at places where the light 
 particles on reaching the second surface of the film were 
 reflected back to the eye. 
 
 402. The theory of emission is here at direct issue with 
 the theory of undulation. Newton assumes that the action 
 which produces the alternate bright and dark rings takes 
 place at a single surface ; i. e., the second surface of the 
 film. The undulatory theory affirms that the rings are 
 caused by the interference of rays reflected from both 
 surfaces. This has been proved to be the case. By 
 employing polarized light (to be subsequently described 
 and explained) we can destroy the reflection at the first 
 surface of the film, and when this is done the rings vanish 
 altogether. 
 
 403. The beauty and subtlety of Newton's conception 
 are, however, manifest ; and the theory was apparently 
 supported by the fact that rings of feeble intensity are 
 actually formed by transmitted light, and that the bright 
 rings by transmitted light correspond to thicknesses which 
 produce dark rings in reflected light. 
 
 404. The transmitted rings are referred by the un- 
 dulatory theory to the interference of rays which have 
 passed directly through the film, with others which have 
 undergone two reflections within the film. They are thus 
 completely accounted for. 
 
 NOTE. The thickness 1 ^^ 0o - 5 - of an inch referred to in 
 Note 396, as that corresponding to the first bright ring, is 
 one-fourth of the length of an undulation of the light em- 
 ployed by Newton. Hence, in passing to and fro through 
 the film, the rays reflected at the second surface are half 
 an undulation behind those reflected at the first surface. 
 At this thickness, therefore, the ring ought, according to 
 the principles of interference, to be darJc instead of bright. 
 The same remarks apply to the thicknesses 
 
DOUBLE REFRACTION. 101 
 
 T __5___ 5 etc. ; the former corresponds to a retardation of 
 three, and the latter to a retardation of five semi-undula- 
 tions. With regard to the dark rings, the first of them 
 occurs at a thickness the double of which is the length of 
 a whole undulation ; the second of them occurs at a thick- 
 ness which, when doubled, is equal to two wave-lengths ; 
 the third at a thickness the double of which is three wave- 
 lengths. Hence, if we take the thickness of the film alone 
 into account, the bright rings ought to be dark, and the 
 dark rings bright. 
 
 But something besides thickness is to be considered 
 here. In the case of the first surface of the film the wave 
 passes from the dense ethej?-Qf the glass into the rare ether 
 of the air. In the case of the second surface of the film 
 the wave passes from the rare ether of the air into the 
 dense ether of the glass. This difference at the two re- 
 flecting surfaces of the film can be proved to be equivalent 
 to the addition of half a wave-length to the thickness of 
 the film. To the absolute thickness, therefore, as meas- 
 ured by Newton, half a wave-length is in each case to be 
 added ; when this is done the rings follow each other in 
 exact accordance with the law of interference enunciated 
 in Notes 348 to 350. 
 
 Double Refraction. 
 
 405. In air, water, and well-annealed glass, the luminif- 
 erous ether has the same elasticity in all directions. There 
 is nothing in the molecular grouping of these substances 
 to interfere with the perfect homogeneity of tbe ether. 
 
 406. But when water crystallizes to ice, the case is 
 different; here the molecules are constrained by their 
 proper forces to arrange themselves in a certain determi- 
 nate manner. They are, for example, closer together in 
 
102 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 some directions than in others. This arrangement of the 
 molecules carries along with it an arrangement of the sur- 
 rounding ether, which causes it to possess different degrees 
 of elasticity in different directions. 
 
 407. In a plate of ice, for example, the elasticity of the 
 ether in a direction perpendicular to the surface of freezing 
 is different from its elasticity in a direction parallel to the 
 same surface. 
 
 408. This difference is displayed in a peculiarly strik- 
 ing manner by Iceland spar, which is crystallized car- 
 bonate of lime ; and in consequence of the existence of 
 these two different elasticities, a wave of light passing 
 through the spar is divided into two ; the one rapid, cor- 
 responding to the greater elasticity, and the other slow, 
 corresponding to the lesser elasticity* 
 
 409. Where the velocity is greatest, the refraction is 
 least ; and where the velocity is least the refraction is 
 greatest. Hence in Iceland spar, as we have two waves 
 moving with different velocities, we have double refrac- 
 tion. 
 
 410. This is also true of the greater number of crys- 
 talline bodies. If the grouping of the molecules be not 
 in all directions alike, the ether will not be in all direc- 
 tions equally elastic, and double refraction will infallibly 
 result. 
 
 411. In rock-salt, alum, and other crystals, this homo- 
 geneous grouping of the molecules actually occurs, and 
 such crystals behave like glass, water, or air. 
 
 412. In certain doubly refracting crystals the molecules 
 are arranged in the same manner on all sides of a certain 
 direction. For example, in the case of ice the molecular 
 arrangement is the same all round the perpendiculars to 
 the surface of freezing. 
 
 413. In like manner, in Iceland spar the molecules are 
 
DOUBLE REFRACTION. 103 
 
 arranged symmetrically round the crystallographic axis, 
 that is, round the shortest diagonal of the rhomb into 
 which the crystal may be cloven.* 
 
 414. When a beam of light passes through ice per- 
 pendicular to the surface of freezing, or through Iceland 
 spar parallel to the crystallographic axis, there is no 
 double refraction. These cases are representative ; that 
 is to say, there is no double refraction in the direction 
 round which the molecular arrangement is in all directions 
 the same. 
 
 415. This direction of no double refraction is called the 
 optic axis of the crystal. 
 
 NOTE. The vibrations of the ether being transverse 
 to the direction of the ray, the elasticity which determines 
 the rapidity of transmission is that at right angles to the 
 ray's direction. In Iceland spar the velocity is slowest 
 in the direction of the axis ; hence the elasticity at right 
 angles to the axis is a minimum. The ray, on the other 
 hand, whose vibrations are executed along the axis is the 
 most rapid ; hence the elasticity of the ether along the 
 axis is a maximum. In perfectly homogeneous bodies 
 the surface of elasticity would be spherical ; it would be 
 measured by the same length of radius in all directions. 
 In the case of Iceland spar the surface of elasticity is an 
 ellipsoid whose longer axis coincides with the axis of the 
 crystal. 
 
 * The arrangement of the molecules is such, that Iceland spar may 
 be cloven with great and equal facility in three different directions. The 
 planes of cleavage are here oblique to each other. Rock-salt also cleaves 
 readily and equally in three directions, the planes of cleavage being at 
 right angles to each other. Hence, while rock-salt cleaves into cubes, 
 Iceland spar cleaves into rhombs. Many crystals cleave with different 
 facilities in different directions. Selenite and crystallized sugar (sugar- 
 candy) are examples. 
 
104 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 Phenomena presented by Iceland Spar. 
 
 416. The two beams into which the incident beam is 
 divided by the spar do not behave alike. One of them 
 obeys the ordinary law of refraction ; its index of refrac- 
 tion is perfectly constant and independent of its direction 
 through the crystal. The angles of incidence and refrac- 
 tion are in the same plane, as in the case of ordinary re- 
 fraction. The ray which behaves thus is called the ordi- 
 nary ray. In its case the sine of the angle of incidence 
 is to the sine of the angle of refraction, or the velocity of 
 light in air is to its velocity in the crystal, in the constant 
 ratio of 1.654 to 1.. The number 1.654 is the ordinary 
 index of Iceland spar. 
 
 417. But the other beam acts differently. Its index 
 of refraction is not constant, nor is the angle of refraction 
 as a general rule in the same plane as the angle of inci- 
 dence. The ray which behaves thus is called the extraor- 
 dinary ray. If a prism be formed of the spar with its 
 refracting angle parallel to the optic axis, when the 
 incident beam traverses the prism at right angles to the 
 optic axis, the separation of its two parts is a maximum. 
 Here the full difference of elasticity between the axial 
 direction and that perpendicular to it comes into play, 
 and the extraordinary ray suffers its minimum retarda- 
 tion, and therefore its minimum refraction. Its refractive 
 index is then 1.483. 
 
 418. The index of refraction of the extraordinary ray 
 varies with its direction through the crystal from 1.483 to 
 1.654. The minimum value of the ratio of the two sines, 
 or of the two velocities, viz., 1.483, is called the extraordi- 
 nary index. 
 
 419. When a small aperture through which light 
 passes is regarded through a rhomb of Iceland spar two 
 
PHENOMENA PRESENTED BY ICELAND SPAR. 105 
 
 apertures are seen. If the rhomb be placed over a black 
 dot on a sheet of white paper, two dots will be seen ; and 
 if the spar be turned, one of the images of the aperture or 
 of the dot will rotate round the other. 
 
 420. The rotating image is that formed by the ex- 
 traordinary ray. 
 
 421. One of the two images of the dot is also nearer 
 than the other. The ordinary ray behaves as if it came 
 from a more highly refractive medium, and the greater 
 the refraction the nearer must the image appear. The ap- 
 parent shallowness of water is referred to in Notes 131 
 and 132. With bisulphide of carbon the shallowness 
 would be more pronounced, because the refraction is 
 greater. In Iceland spar the ordinary index bears nearly 
 the same relation to the extraordinary as the index of 
 bisulphide of carbon to that of water; hence the ordi- 
 nary image must appear nearer than the extraordinary 
 one. 
 
 422. Brewster showed that a great number of crystals 
 possessed two optic axes, or two directions on which a 
 beam passes through the crystal without division. Crys- 
 tallized sugar, mica, heavy spar, sulphate of lime, and topaz, 
 are examples. 
 
 423. Thus crystals divide themselves into 
 
 I. Single refracting crystals, such as rock-salt, alum, 
 and fluor-spar ; and 
 
 II. Double refracting crystals, of which we have two 
 kinds, viz. : 
 
 a. Uniaxal crystals, or those with a single optic axis, 
 such as Iceland spar, rock-crystal, and tourmaline ; and 
 
 b. Biaxal crystals, or those which possess two optic 
 axes, such as arragonite, felspar, and those mentioned in 
 422. 
 
106 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 424. When on a plate of Iceland spar cut perpen- 
 dicular to the axis, a beam of light falls obliquely, the 
 ordinary ray being the more refracted is nearer to the 
 axis than the extraordinary. The extraordinary ray is as 
 it were repelled by the axis. But Biot showed that there 
 are many crystals in which the reverse occurs, in which, that 
 is to say, the extraordinary ray is nearer to the axis than 
 the ordinary, being as it were attracted. The former class 
 he called repulsive or negative crystals ; Iceland spar, ruby, 
 sapphire, emerald, beryl, and tourmaline, being examples. 
 The latter class he called attractive or positive crystals, 
 rock-crystal, ice, zircon, being examples. 
 
 The Polarization of Light. 
 
 425. The double refraction of Iceland spar was dis- 
 covered by Erasmus Bartholinus, and was first described 
 by him in a work published in Copenhagen in 1669. The 
 celebrated Huyghens sought to account for the phenome- 
 non on the principles of a wave theory, and he succeeded 
 in doing so. 
 
 426. In his experiments on this subject, Huyghens 
 found that when a common luminous beam passes through 
 Iceland spar in any direction save one (that of the optic 
 axis), it is always divided into two beams of equal intensi- 
 ty / but that when either of these two half-beams is sent 
 through a second piece of spar, it is usually divided into 
 two of unequal intensity ; and that there are two posi- 
 tions of the spar in which one of the beams vanishes alto- 
 gether. 
 
 427. On turning the spar round this position of absolute 
 disappearance, the missing beam appeared ; its companion 
 at the same time becoming dimmer ; both of them then 
 passed through a phase of equal intensity, and when the 
 
THE POLARIZATION OF LIGHT. 107 
 
 rotation was continued, the beam which was first trans- 
 mitted disappeared. 
 
 428. Reflecting on this experiment Newton came to 
 the conclusion that the divided beam had acquired sides 
 by its passage through the Iceland spar, and that its inter- 
 ception and transmission depended on the way on which 
 those sides presented themselves to the molecules of the 
 second crystal. He compared this two-sidedness of a beam 
 of light to the two-endedness of a magnet known as its 
 polarity ; and a luminous beam exhibiting, this two-sided- 
 ness was afterward said to be polarized. 
 
 429. In 1808, Mains, while looking through a bire- 
 fracting prism at one of the windows of the Luxembourg 
 Palace, from which the solar light was reflected, found 
 that in a certain position of the spar, the ordinary image 
 of the window almost wholly disappeared ; while, in a 
 position perpendicular to this, the extraordinary image 
 disappeared. He discerned the analogy between this 
 action and that discovered by Huyghensin Iceland spar, 
 and came to the conclusion that the effect was due to 
 some new property impressed upon the light by its reflec- 
 tion from the glass. 
 
 430. What is this property ? It may be most simply 
 studied and understood by means of the crystal called 
 tourmaline. This crystal is birefractive ; it divides a 
 beam of light incident upon it into two, but its molecular 
 grouping, and the consequent disposition of the ether 
 within it, are such that one of these beams is rapidly 
 quenched, while the other is transmitted with comparative 
 freedom. 
 
 431. It is to be borne in mind that the motions of the 
 individual ether particles are transverse to the direction in 
 which the light is propagated (read Note 219). In a 
 
108 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 learn of ordinary light the mirations occur in all direc- 
 tions round the line of propagation. 
 
 432. The change suffered by light in passing through 
 a plate of tourmaline, of sufficient thickness, and cut paral- 
 lel to the axis is this : All vibrations save those executed 
 parallel to the axis are quenched within the crystal. Hence 
 the beam emergent from the plate of tourmaline has all its 
 vibrations reduced to a single plane. In this condition it 
 is a beam of plane polarized l^ahh^ 
 
 433. Imagine a cylindrical beam of light with all its 
 ether particles vibrating in the same direction say hori- 
 zontally looked down upon vertically, the ether particles, 
 if large enough, would be seen performing their excursions 
 to and fro across the direction of the beam. Looked at 
 crosswise horizontally, the particles would be seen ad- 
 vancing and retreating, but their paths would be invisible, 
 every ether particle covering its own path. In the one 
 case we should see the lines of excursion ; in the other case, 
 the ends of the lines only. In this, according to the 
 undulatory theory, consists the two-sidedness discovered 
 by Huyghens, and commented on by Newton. 
 
 Polarization of Light by ^Reflection. 
 
 434. The quality of two-sidedness is also impressed 
 upon light by reflection. This is the great discovery of 
 Malus. A beam reflected from glass is in part polarized 
 at all oblique incidences, a portion of its vibrations being 
 reduced to a common plane. At one particular incidence 
 the beam is perfectly polarized, all its vibrations being 
 reduced to the same plane. The angle of incidence which 
 corresponds to this perfect polarization is called the polar- 
 izing angle. 
 
 435. The polarizing angle is connected with the index 
 
POLARIZATION OF LIGHT BY REFLECTION. 109 
 
 of refraction of the medium by a very beautiful law dis- 
 covered by Sir David Brewster.* When a luminous beam 
 is incident upon a transparent substance, it is in part 
 reflected and in part refracted. At one particular inci- 
 dence the reflected and refracted portions of the beam are 
 at right angles to each other. The angle of incidence is 
 then the polarizing angle. This is the geometrical expres- 
 sion of the law of Brewster. 
 
 436. The polarizing angle augments with the refractive 
 index of the medium. For water it is 53, for glass 58, 
 and for diamond 68. 
 
 437. Thus a beam of ordinary light, whose vibrations 
 are executed in all directions, impinging upon a plate of 
 glass at the polarizing angle, has, after reflection, all its 
 vibrations reduced to a common plane. The direction of 
 the vibrations of the polarized beam is parallel to the polar- 
 izing surface. 
 
 438. Let a beam thus polarized by reflection at the 
 surface of one plate of glass impinge upon a second plate 
 at the polarizing angle. In one position of this plate the 
 beam suffers its maximum reflection. In a certain other 
 position the beam is wholly transmitted, there is no reflec- 
 tion. In this experiment the angle of incidence remains 
 unchanged, nothing being altered save the side of the ray 
 which strikes the reflecting surface. 
 
 439. The reflection of the polarized beam is a maxi- 
 mum when the lines along which the ether particles vibrate 
 are parallel to the reflecting surface. It is wholly trans- 
 mitted w T hen the lines of vibration strike the reflecting 
 surface at the polarizing angle. The reflection is then 
 zero. By taking advantage of this fact, the reflection 
 from the first surface of a thin film has been abolished, 
 
 * The index of refraction of the medium is the tangent of the polar- 
 izing angle. 
 
110 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 Newton's rings being thereby rendered incapable of for- 
 mation, as stated in Note 402. 
 
 440. A beam which meets the first surface of a plate 
 of glass with parallel sides at the polarizing angle meets 
 the second surface also at its polarizing angle, and is in 
 part reflected there perfectly polarized. Hence, by aug- 
 menting the number of plates, the repeated reflections at 
 their limiting surfaces furnish a polarized beam of greater 
 intensity than that obtained by reflection at a single 
 surface. 
 
 Polarization of Light by Refraction. 
 
 441. We have hitherto directed our attention to the 
 reflected portion of the beam ; but the refracted portion, 
 which enters the glass, is also partially polarized. The 
 quantities of polarized light in the reflected and refracted 
 beams are always equal to each other. 
 
 442. The plane of vibration in the refracted beam is at 
 right angles to that in the reflected beam. 
 
 443. When several plates of glass are placed parallel 
 to each other, and a beam is permitted to fall upon them 
 at the polarizing angle, at every passage from plate to 
 plate a portion of the light is reflected polarized, an equal 
 portion of polarized light entering the glass at the same 
 time. By duly augmenting the number of plates, the 
 polarization by the successive refractions may be ren- 
 dered sensibly perfect. When this occurs, if any further 
 plates be added to the bundle, reflection entirely ceases at 
 their limiting surfaces, the beam afterward being wholly 
 transmitted. 
 
 Polarization of Light by Double Refraction. 
 
 444. In the case last considered the light was polarized 
 by ordinary refraction. The polarization of light by double 
 
LIGHT TRANSMITTED THROUGH ICELAND SPAR. HI 
 
 refraction has been already touched upon in Notes 432 
 and 433. We shall now extend our examination of the 
 crystal of tourmaline there referred to, and turn it to ac- 
 count in the examination of other crystals. 
 
 445. If a beam of light which has passed through one 
 plate of tourmaline impinge upon a second plate, it will 
 pass through both, if the axes of the two plates be parallel. 
 But if they are perpendicular to each other, then the light 
 transmitted by the one is quenched by the other, dark- 
 ness marking the space where the two plates are super- 
 posed. 
 
 446. If the two axes be oblique to each other, a portion 
 of the light will pass through both plates. For, in a 
 manner similar to the resolution of forces in ordinary me- 
 chanics, an oblique vibration may be resolved into two, 
 one parallel to the axis of the tourmaline, the other per- 
 pendicular to the axis. The latter component is quenched, 
 but the former is transmitted. 
 
 447. Hence if the axes of two plates of tourmaline be 
 perpendicular to each other, a third plate of tourmaline 
 introduced obliquely between them, or a plate of any other 
 crystal which acts in a manner similar to the tourmaline, 
 will transmit a portion of the light emergent from the 
 first crystal. The plane of vibration of this light being 
 oblique to the axis of the second crystal, a portion of the 
 light will also pass through the latter. By the intro- 
 duction, therefore, of a third crystal, with its axis oblique, 
 we abolish in part the darkness of the space where the two 
 rectangular plates are superposed. 
 
 Examination of Light transmitted through Iceland Spar. 
 
 448. We have now to examine, by means of a plate 
 of tourmaline, the two parts into which a luminous beam 
 is divided in its passage through Iceland spar. 
 
NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 449. Confining our attention to one of the two beams, 
 it is immediately found that in a certain position of the 
 plate the light is freely transmitted, while in the per- 
 pendicular position it is completely stopped. This proves 
 the beam emergent from the spar to be polarized. 
 
 450. From the position of the tourmaline we can im- 
 mediately infer the direction of vibration in the polarized 
 beam. If transmission occur when the axis 6f the plate 
 of tourmaline is vertical, the vibrations are vertical ; if 
 transmission occur when the tourmaline is horizontal, the 
 vibrations are horizontal. The same mode of investiga- 
 tion teaches us that the second beam emergent from the 
 spar is also polarized. 
 
 451. The vibrations of the ether particles in the two 
 beams are executed in planes which are at right angles to 
 each other. If the vibrations in the one beam be vertical, 
 in the other they are horizontal. A plate of tourmaline 
 with its axis vertical transmits the former and quenches 
 the latter; while the same plate held horizontally, quenches 
 the former and transmits the latter. 
 
 452. A tourmaline plate placed with its axis vertical, 
 in front of the electric lamp, has its image cast by a lens 
 upon a screen. A piece of Iceland spar, with one of its 
 planes of vibration horizontal and the other vertical, 
 placed in front of the lens divides the beam into two, and 
 yields two images of the tourmaline. One of these images 
 is bright, the other is dark. The reason is, that in the 
 light emergent from the tourmaline the vibrations are 
 vertical, and they can only be transmitted through the 
 spar in company with its vertically vibrating beam., In 
 the horizontally vibrating beam the tourmaline must ap- 
 pear black. 
 
 453. It is also black if the light emergent from it, and 
 surrounding it, meet, at the polarizing angle, a plate of 
 
LIGHT TRANSMITTED THROUGH ICELAND SPAR. H3 
 
 glass whose plane of reflection is vertical y while it is 
 bright when the light is reflected horizontally. These 
 effects are consequences of the law of polarization by re- 
 flection. 
 
 454. Not only do crystallized bodies possess this 
 power of double refraction and polarization; but all bodies 
 whose atomic grouping is such as to cause the ether with- 
 in them to possess different elasticities in different direc- 
 tions do the same. 
 
 455. Thus organic structures are usually double re- 
 fracting. A double refracting structure may also be con- 
 ferred on ordinary glass by either strain or pressure. 
 Strains and pressures due to unequal heating also produce 
 double refraction. Unannealed glass behaves like a crys- 
 tal. A plate of common window-glass, which under ordi- 
 nary circumstances shows no trace of double refraction, if 
 heated at a single point, is rendered doubly refractive by 
 the strains and pressures propagated round the heated 
 point. The introduction of any of these bodies between 
 the crossed plates of tourmaline partly abolishes the dark- 
 ness caused by the superposition of the plates. 
 
 456. Two plates of tourmaline, between which bodies 
 may be introduced and examined by polarized light, con- 
 stitute a simple form of the polariscope. The plate at 
 which the light first enters is called the polarizer, while 
 the second plate is called the analyzer. 
 
 457. But the tourmalines are small, usually colored, 
 and under no circumstances competent to furnish an in- 
 tense beam of polarized light. If one of the parts into 
 which a prism of Iceland spar divides a beam of light 
 could be abolished, the remaining beam would be polar- 
 ized, and, because of the transparency of the spar, it 
 would be far more intense than any beam obtainable from 
 tourmaline. 
 
114 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 458. This has been accomplished with great skill by 
 Nicol. He cut a long parallelopiped of spar into two by 
 a very oblique section; polished the two surfaces, and 
 united them by Canada balsam. The refrangibility of 
 the balsam lies between those of the ordinary and the ex- 
 traordinary rays in Iceland spar, being less than the 
 former and greater than the latter. When, therefore, a 
 beam of light is sent along the parallelopiped, the ordi- 
 nary ray, to enter the balsam, must pass from a denser to 
 a rarer medium. In consequence of the obliquity of its 
 incidence it is totally reflected, and is thus got rid of. 
 The extraordinary ray, on the contrary, in passing from 
 the spar to the balsam passes from a rarer to a denser 
 medium, and is therefore transmitted. In this way we 
 obtain a single intense beam of polarized light (read Notes 
 123, 141, and 142). 
 
 459. A parallelopiped prepared in the fashion here de- 
 scribed is called a NicoVs prism. 
 
 460. Nicol's prisms are of immense use in experiments 
 on polarization. With them the best polariscopes are 
 constructed. Reflecting polariscopes are also constructed, 
 consisting of two plates of glass, one of which polarizes 
 the light by reflection, the other examining the light so 
 polarized. The beam reflected from the polarizer is in this 
 case reflected or quenched by the analyzer according as 
 the planes of reflection of the two mirrors are parallel or 
 at right angles to each other. 
 
 Colors of Double-refracting Crystals in Polarized Light. 
 
 461. A large class of these colors may be illustrated 
 and explained by reference to the deportment of thin 
 plates of gypsum (crystallized sulphate of lime, commonly 
 called selenite) between the polarizer and analyzer of the 
 polariscope. 
 

 COLORS OF DOUBLE-REFRACTING CRYSTALS. H5 
 
 462. The crystal cleaves with 'great freedom in one 
 direction ; it cleaves with less freedom in two others ; the 
 latter two cleavages are also unequal. In other words, 
 gypsum possesses three planes of cleavage, no two of 
 which are equal in value, but one of which particularly 
 signalizes itself by its perfection. 
 
 463. By following these three cleavages it is easy to 
 obtain from the crystal diamond-shaped laminaB of any re- 
 quired thinness. 
 
 464.. The crystal, as might be expected from the char- 
 acter of its cleavages, is double-refracting. A beam of 
 ordinary light impinging at right angles on a plate of 
 gypsum, whose surfaces are those of most perfect cleavage, 
 has . its vibrations reduced to two planes at right angles 
 to each other ; that is to say, the beam whose ether, prior 
 to entering the gypsum, vibrates in all transverse direc- 
 tions, after it has entered the gypsum, and after its 
 emergence from it, vibrates in two rectangular directions 
 only. 
 
 465. The elasticity of the ether is different in these 
 two rectangular directions ; consequently the one beam 
 passes more rapidly through the gypsum than the other. 
 
 466. In refracting bodies generally the retardation of 
 the light consists in a diminution of the wave-length of 
 the light. The rate of vibration is unchanged during 
 the passage of the light through the refracting body. 
 The case is exactly similar to that of a musical sound 
 transmitted from water into air. The velocity is reduced 
 to one-fourth by the transfer, because the wave-length is 
 reduced to one-fourth. But the pitch, depending as it 
 does on the number of waves which reach the ear in a 
 second, is unaltered. 
 
 467. Because of the difference of elasticity between 
 the two rectangular directions of vibration in gypsum, the 
 
116 NOTES OX LIGHT. 
 
 waves of ether in the one direction arc more shortened 
 than in the other. 
 
 468. In the experiments with a plate of gypsnm now 
 to be described and explained, we shall employ as polar- 
 izer a piece of Iceland spar, one of whose beams is in- 
 tercepted by a diaphragm. A Nicol's prism shall be our 
 analyzer. 
 
 469. When the planes of vibration of the spar and 
 of the Mcol coincide, the light passes through both and 
 may be received upon a screen. When the planes of 
 vibration are at right angles to each other, the light emer- 
 gent from the spar is intercepted by the Nicol, and the 
 screen is dark. 
 
 470. If a plate of selenite be placed between the 
 polarizer and analyzer, with either of its planes of vibra- 
 tion coincident with that of the polarizer or analyzer, it 
 produces no change upon the screen. If the screen be 
 light, it remains light ; if it be dark, it remains dark after 
 the introduction of the gypsum, which here behaves like 
 a plate of ordinary glass. 
 
 471. Let us assume the screen to be dark. Interpos- 
 ing a thick plate of gypsum with its directions of vibra- 
 tion oblique to that of the polarizer or analyzer, white light 
 reaches the screen. If the plate be thin, the light which 
 reaches the screen is colored. If the plate be of uniform 
 thickness, the color is uniform. If of different thicknesses, 
 or if in cleaving thin scales cling to the surface of the film, 
 some portions of the plate will be differently colored from 
 the rest. 
 
 472. When thick plates are employed, the different 
 colors, as in the case of thin plates, are superposed, and re- 
 blended to white light. 
 
 473. The quantity of light which reaches the eye is a 
 maximum when the planes of vibration of the gypsum 
 
COLORS OF DOUBLE-REFRACTING CRYSTALS. H7 
 
 enclose an angle of 45 with those of the polarizer and 
 analyzer. 
 
 474. If the plate of selenite be a thin wedge, and if the 
 light be monochromatic, say red, alternately bright (red) 
 and dark bands are thrown upon the screen. 
 
 475. If, instead of red light, blue be employed, the 
 blue bands are found to occur at smaller thicknesses than 
 those which produced the red : other colors occur at inter- 
 mediate thicknesses. Hence when white light is employed, 
 instead of bands of brightness separated from each other 
 by bands of darkness, we have a series of iris-colored 
 bands. 
 
 476. If, instead of a wedge gradually augmenting in 
 thickness from the edge toward the back, we employ a disk 
 gradually augmenting in thickness from the centre out- 
 ward ; instead of a series of parallel bands we obtain under 
 similar circumstances, in white light, a series of concentric 
 iris-colored circles. 
 
 477. Here, then, we have in the first instance a beam 
 of plane polarized light impinging on the selenite. The 
 direction of vibration of this beam is resolved into two 
 others at right angles to each other; namely, into the 
 two directions in which the ether vibrates within the crys- 
 tal. One of these systems of waves is retarded with refer- 
 ence to the other. 
 
 478. But as long as the rays vibrate at right angles to 
 each other, they cannot interfere so as to augment or di- 
 minish the intensity. To effect such interference the rays 
 must vibrate in the same place. 
 
 479. The function of the analyzer is to reduce the two 
 rectangular wave-systems to a single plane. Here the 
 effect of retardation is at once felt, and the waves conspire 
 or oppose each other according as their vibrations are in 
 the same phase or in opposite phases. 
 
118 - NOTES OX LIGHT. 
 
 480. When the vibration planes of the polarizer and 
 analyzer are parallel^ a thickness of the gypsum crystal 
 which produces a retardation of half an undulation causes 
 the light to be extinguished by the analyzer. 
 
 481. When the polarizer and analyzer are crossed, a 
 retardation of half an undulation, or of any odd number 
 of half undulations, within the crystal does not produce 
 extinction when these vibrations are compounded by the 
 analyzer. A retardation of a whole undulation, or of any 
 number of whole undulations, produces in this case extinc- 
 tion. This, when followed out, is a plain consequence of 
 the composition of the vibrations. 
 
 482. Expressed generally, the phenomena exhibited by 
 the parallel and crossed polarizer and analyzer are com- 
 plementary. If the field be dark when they are crossed, 
 it is bright when they are parallel. If the field be green 
 when they are crossed, it is red when they are parallel ; 
 if yellow when they are crossed, it is blue when they are 
 parallel. Thus a rotation of 90 always brings out the 
 complementary color. 
 
 483. If instead of the Mcol we employ a birefracting 
 prism of Iceland spar, the colors of the selejiite produced 
 by the two oppositely-polarized beams will be comple- 
 mentary. The overlapping of the two colors always pro- 
 duces white. Any other double-refracting substance, 
 whether crystallized, organized, mechanically pressed or 
 strained, exhibits, on examination by polarized light, phe- 
 nomena similar to those of the gypsum. 
 
 484. A common beam of light is equivalent in all its 
 effects to two beams vibrating in two rectangular planes. 
 As two such beams cannot interfere, we cannot have the 
 colors of the selenite in common light. 
 
KINGS SURROUNDING THE AXES OF CRYSTALS. H9 
 
 Rings surrounding the Axes of Crystals in Polarized 
 Light. 
 
 485. A pencil of rays passing along the axis through 
 Iceland spar suffers no division ; but if inclined to the axis, 
 however slightly, the pencil is divided into two, which 
 vibrate in rectangular planes, and one of which is more 
 retarded than the other. 
 
 486. If the incident light be polarized, on quitting the 
 spar, oblique to the axis, it will be in a condition similar 
 to the light emergent from the plates of gypsum already 
 referred to. When two rectangular vibrations, passing 
 through the same ether, are reduced to the same plane by 
 the analyzer, interference occurs ; the two rays either con- 
 spiring or opposing each other. 
 
 487. Whether they conspire or not depends upon the 
 amount of relative retardation, and this again depends 
 upon the thickness of the spar traversed by the two rays. 
 If they conspire at a certain thickness they will also con- 
 spire at twice that thickness, thrice that thickness, etc. 
 Those thicknesses at which the rays conspire are separated 
 by others at which they oppose each other. 
 
 488. With a conical beam whose central ray passes 
 along the axis, the effects are symmetrical all round the 
 axis ; and when the crystal, illuminated by such a ray, is 
 examined by monochromatic polarized light, we have a 
 series of bright and dark circles surrounding the axis. 
 
 489. When the light is red the circles are larger than 
 when the light is blue ; the smaller the wave-length the 
 smaller are the circles. Hence, since the different colors 
 are not superposed, when white light is employed instead 
 of bands of alternate brightness and darkness we have ? 
 series of iris-colored circles. 
 
120 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 When the polarizer and analyzer are crossed the sys- 
 tem of bands is intersected by a "black cross, whose arms 
 are parallel to the planes of vibration in the polarizer and 
 analyzer. Those rays, whose planes of vibration within 
 the crystal coincide with the planes of either the polarizer 
 or analyzer, cannot get through either, and their complete 
 interception forms the two arms of the cross. Those rays 
 whose planes of vibration enclose an angle of 45 with 
 that of the polarizer or analyzer produce the greatest effect 
 when they conspire. At this inclination the bright ring 
 is at its maximum brilliancy, from which, right and left, 
 it becomes more feeble, until it finally merges into the 
 darkness of the cross. 
 
 490. A rotation of 90 produces here, as in other cases, 
 the complementary phenomena : the black cross becomes 
 white, and the circles change their tints to complementary 
 ones. 
 
 491. In crystals possessing two optic axes a series of 
 iris-colored bands surround both axes, each band forming 
 a curve, which its discoverer, James Bernoulli, called a 
 lemniscata. 
 
 Elliptic and Circular Polarization. 
 
 492. Two rays of light vibrating at right angles to 
 each other, however the one system of vibrations may be 
 retarded with reference to the other, cannot, as already 
 stated, interfere so as to produce either an increase or a 
 diminution of the light. 
 
 493. But though the intensity remains unchanged, the 
 rays act upon each other. If one of them differs from the 
 other by any exact number of semi-undulations, the two 
 rays are compounded to a single rectilinear vibration. In 
 all other cases the resultant vibration is elliptical / in one 
 
ROTARY POLARIZATION. 121 
 
 particular case the ellipse in which the individual particles 
 of ether move is converted into a circle. This occurs when 
 one of the systems of waves is an exact quarter of an 
 undulation behind the other ; we have then circular polar- 
 ization. 
 
 494. This compounding of ethereal vibration is me- 
 chanically the same as the compounding of the vibrations 
 of an ordinary pendulum ; or as the compounding of the 
 vibrations of two rectangular tuning-forks by the method 
 of Lissajous.* 
 
 495. Elliptic polarization is the rule and not the excep- 
 tion. It is particularly manifested in reflection from 
 metals, and from transparent bodies which possess a high 
 index of refraction. Jamin has detected it in light reflected 
 from all bodies. 
 
 Rotary Polarization. 
 
 496. A polarized ray of monochromatic light, as al- 
 ready stated, suffers no change during its transmission 
 through Iceland spar in the direction of the optic axis. 
 
 497. But if transmitted through rock-crystal (quartz) 
 in the direction of the optic axis, its plane of vibration is 
 turned by the crystal. Supposing the polarizer and ana- 
 lyzer of the polariscope to be crossed so as to produce 
 perfect darkness before the crystal is introduced between 
 them, on its introduction light will pass, and to quench 
 the light the analyzer must be turned into a new position. 
 The angle through which the analyzer is turned measures 
 the rotation of the plane of vibration. 
 
 498. Some specimens of rock-crystal turn the plane of 
 vibration to the right, and others to the left. The former 
 are called right-handed and the latter left-handed crystals. 
 
 * See Lectures on Sound, 1st ed., p. 307. 
 6 
 
122 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 Sir John Herschel connected this optical difference with a 
 visible difference of crystalline form. 
 
 499. In the celebrated experiment of Faraday, with a 
 bar of heavy glass, the plane of vibration was caused to 
 rotate both by a magnet and an electric current ; the 
 direction of rotation bearing a constant relation to the 
 polarity of the magnet and to the direction of the current. 
 
 500. The subject of rotary polarization was examined 
 with great care and completeness by Biot, and he estab- 
 lished certain laws regarding it, two of which may be 
 enunciated here : 
 
 1. The amount of the rotation is proportional to the 
 thickness of the plate of rock-crystal. 
 
 2. The rotation of the plane of vibration is different 
 for the different rays of the spectrum, increasing with the 
 refrangibility of the light. 
 
 Thus with a plate of rock-crystal one millimetre thick, 
 he obtained the following rotations for the mean rays of 
 the respective colors of the spectrum : 
 
 Red, 19. 
 Orange, 21' 
 Yellow, 23 C 
 
 Green, 28 C 
 Blue, 32. 
 
 Indio 36 
 
 Violet, 41 
 
 With a plate two millimetres in thickness the rotation for 
 red is 38 and for violet 82. 
 
 501. Since, then, the rays of different colors emerge 
 from the rock-crystal vibrating in different planes, when 
 such light falls upon the analyzer that color only whose 
 plane of vibration coincides with that of the analyzer will 
 be transmitted. By turning the analyzer we allow the 
 other colors to pass in succession. 
 
 502. The phenomena of rotary polarization are pro- 
 duced by the interference of two circularly-polarized pen- 
 
 of light, which are propagated along the axis with 
 
CONCLUSION. 123 
 
 unequal velocities, the one revolving from left to right, 
 and the other revolving in the opposite direction.* 
 
 CONCLUSION. 
 
 I have endeavored in these lectures to bring before 
 you the views at present entertained by all eminent scien- 
 tific thinkers regarding the nature of light. I have en- 
 deavored to make as clear to you as possible that bold 
 theory according to which space is filled with an elastic 
 substance capable of transmitting the motions of light and 
 heat. And consider how impossible it is to escape from 
 this or some similar theory to avoid ascribing to light, 
 in space, a material basis. Solar light and heat require 
 about eight minutes to travel from the sun to the earth. 
 During this time the light and heat are .detached from 
 both. Enclose, in idea, a portion of the intervening space 
 say a cubic mile of it occupied for a moment by light 
 and heat. Ask yourselves what they are. The first in- 
 quiry toward a solution is, What can they do ? We only 
 know things by their effects. What, then, are the effects 
 which this cubic mile of light and heat can produce ? At 
 the earth, where we can operate upon them, we find them 
 capable of producing motion. We can lift weights with 
 them ; we can turn wheels with them ; we can urge locomo- 
 tives with them ; we can fire projectiles with them. What 
 other conclusion can you come to than that the light and 
 heat which thus produce motion are themselves motions f \ 
 
 One cubic mile of space, then, is for a measurable time 
 the vehicle of motion. But is it in the human mind to 
 imagine motion without at the same time imagining some- 
 
 * See Lloyd, Wave Theory, p. 199, etc. 
 
 f Sir William Thomson has attempted to calculate " the mechanical 
 value of a cubic mile of sunlight." 
 
124 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 thing moved ? Certainly not. The very conception of 
 motion necessarily includes that of a moving body. What, 
 then, is the thing moved in the case of our cubic mile of 
 sunlight ? The undulatory theory replies that it is a sub- 
 stance of determinate mechanical properties, a body which 
 may or may not be a form of ordinary matter, but to 
 which, whether it is or not, we give the name of ether. 
 Let us tolerate no vagueness here ; for the greatest dis- 
 service that could be done to science the surest way to 
 give error a long lease of life is to enshroud scientific 
 theories in vagueness. The motion of the ether com- 
 municated to material substances throws them into mo- 
 tion. It is, therefore, itself a material substance, for we 
 have no knowledge that in nature any thing but a material 
 substance can throw other material substances into mo- 
 tion. Two modes of motion are possible to the ether. 
 Either it is shot through space as a projectile, or it is the 
 vehicle of wave-motion. The projectile theory, though 
 enunciated by Newton, and supported by such men as 
 Laplace, Biot, Brewster, and Malus, has hopelessly broken 
 down. Wave-motion, then, of one kind or another, we 
 must fall back upon. But how does the Wave Theory 
 account for the phenomena? Throughout the greater 
 part of these lectures we have been answering this ques- 
 tion. The cases brought before you are representative. 
 Thousands of facts might be cited in illustration of each 
 of them, and not one of these facts is left unexplained by 
 the undulatory theory. It accounts for all the phenomena 
 of reflection ; for all the phenomena of refraction, single 
 and double ; for all the phenomena of dispersion ; for all 
 the phenomena of diffraction ; for the colors of thick plates 
 and thin, as well as for the colors of all natural bodies. It 
 accounts for all the phenomena of polarization ; for all 
 those wonderful affections, those chromatic splendors ex- 
 
CONCLUSION. 125 
 
 hibited by crystals in polarized light. Thousands of iso- 
 lated facts might, as I have said, be ranged under each 
 of these heads ; the undulatory theory accounts for them 
 all. It traces out illuminated paths through what would 
 otherwise be the most hopeless jungle of phenomena in 
 which human thought could be involved. This is why 
 the foremost men of the age accept the ether not as a 
 vague dream, but as a real entity a substance endowed 
 with inertia, and capable, in accordance with the estab- 
 lished laws of motion, of imparting its thrill to other sub- 
 stances. If there is one conception more firmly fixed in 
 modern scientific thought than another, it is that heat is 
 a mode of motion. Ask yourselves how the vast amount 
 of mechanical energy actually transmitted in the form 
 of heat reaches the earth from the sun. Matter must be 
 its vehicle, and the matter is according to theory the 
 luminiferous ether. 
 
 Thomas Young never saw with his eyes the waves of 
 sound; but he had the force of imagination to picture 
 them and the intellect to investigate them. And he rose 
 from the investigation of the unseen waves of air to that 
 of the unseen waves of ether ; his belief in the one being 
 little, if at all, inferior to his belief in the other. One ex- 
 pression of his will illustrate the perfect definiteness of 
 his ideas. To account for the aberration of light he 
 thought it necessary to assume that the ether which en- 
 compasses the earth does not partake of the motion of our 
 planet through space. His words are : " The ether passes 
 through the solid mass of the earth as the wind passes 
 through a grove of trees." This bold assumption has 
 been shown to be unnecessary by Prof. Stokes, who proves 
 that, by ascribing to the ether properties analogous to 
 those of an elastic solid, aberration would be accounted 
 
126 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 for, without supposing the earth to be thus permeable. 
 Stokes believes in the ether as firmly as Young did. 
 
 I may add, that one of the most refined experimenters 
 in France, M. Fizeau, who is also a a member of the Insti- 
 tute, undertook to determine, some years ago, whether a 
 moving body drags the ether along with it in its motion. 
 His conclusion is, that part of the ether adheres to the 
 molecules of the body, and is transferred along with 
 them. This conclusion may or may not be correct ; but 
 the mere fact that such experiments were undertaken by 
 such a man illustrates the distinctness with which this 
 idea of an ether is held by the most eminent scientific 
 workers of the age. 
 
 But while I have endeavored to place before you with 
 the utmost possible clearness the basis of the undulatory 
 theory, do I therefore wish to close your eyes against any 
 evidence that may arise of its incorrectness ? Far from 
 it. You may say, and justly say, that a hundred years 
 ago another theory was held by the most eminent men, 
 and that, as the theory then held had to yield, the undu- 
 latory theory may have to yield also. This is perfectly 
 logical. Just in the same way, a person in the time of 
 Newton, or even in our own time, might reason thus : The 
 great Ptolemy, and numbers of great men after him, be- 
 lieved that the earth was the centre of the solar system. 
 Ptolemy's theory had to give way, and the theory of 
 gravitation may, in its turn, have to give way also. This 
 is just as logical as the former argument. The strength 
 of the theory of gravitation rests on its competence to ac- 
 count for all the phenomena of the solar system ; and how 
 strong that theory is will be understood by those who 
 have heard in this room Prof. Grant's lucid account of all 
 
CONCLUSION. 127 
 
 that it explains. On a precisely similar basis rests the 
 undulatory theory of light ; only that the phenomena which 
 it explains are far more varied and complex than the phe- 
 nomena of gravitation. You regard, and justly so, the 
 discovery of Neptune as a triumph of theory. Guided by 
 it, Adams and Leverrier calculated the position of a plane- 
 tary mass competent to produce the disturbances of Uranus. 
 Leverrier communicated the result of his calculation to 
 Galle, of Berlin ; and that same night Galle pointed the 
 telescope of the Berlin Observatory to the portion of the 
 heavens indicated by Leverrier, and found there a planet 
 36,000 miles in diameter. 
 
 It so happens that the undulatory theory has also its 
 Neptune. Fresnel had determined the mathematical ex- 
 pression for the wave-surface in crystals possessing two 
 optic axes ; but he did not appear to have an idea of any 
 refraction in such crystals other than double refraction. 
 While the subject was in this condition the late Sir Wil- 
 liam Hamilton, of Dublin, a profound mathematician, 
 took it up, and proved the theory to lead to the conclu- 
 sion that at four special points of the wave-surface the 
 ray was divided not in two parts, but into an infinite 
 number of parts ; forming at those points a continuous 
 conical envelope instead of two images. No human eye 
 had ever seen this envelope when Sir William Hamilton 
 inferred its existence. If the theory of gravitation be 
 true, said Leverrier, in effect, to Dr. Galle, a planet ought 
 to be there : if the theory of undulation be true, said Sir 
 William Hamilton to Dr. Lloyd, my luminous envelope 
 ought to be there. Lloyd took a crystal of Arragonite, 
 and following with the most scrupulous exactness the in- 
 dications of theory, discovered the envelope which had 
 previously been an idea in the mind of the mathematician. 
 
128 NOTES ON LIGHT. 
 
 Whatever may be the strength which the theory of gravi- 
 tation derives from the discovery of Neptune, it is matched 
 by the strength which the undulatory theory derives from 
 the discovery of conical refraction. 
 
 NOTE. 
 
 I would strongly recommend for perusal the essay on 
 Light, published in Sir John Herschel's " Familiar Lectures 
 on Scientific Subjects." 
 
 J. T. 
 
NOTES 
 
 OF A COURSE OF SEVEN LECTURES ON 
 
 ELECTRICITY. 
 
NOTES ON EL-EGTEIOITT. 
 
 Voltaic ^Electricity : the Voltaic Battery. 
 
 1. IF two pieces of the same metal (pure zinc or pure 
 platinum, for example) be immersed in water, which has 
 been rendered sour by the addition of a little sulphuric 
 acid, the acidulated water attacks neither. 
 
 The ordinary zinc of commerce being rendered impure 
 by the admixture of other metals is attacked by the acid. 
 It may, however, be enabled to withstand the acid by 
 covering its surface with mercury. The zinc is dissolved 
 by the mercury, detached from its impurities, and pre- 
 sented to the liquid. This process is called amalga- 
 mation. 
 
 2. If two pieces of two different metals (pure zinc and 
 platinum, for example) be immersed in acidulated water, 
 no sensible action occurs as long as the metals do not touch 
 each other but the moment they touch, and as long as 
 they continue in contact, the zinc is attacked by the acid- 
 ulated water and dissolves, while bubbles of gas rise 
 from the surface of the platinum. 
 
 3. This gas when collected proves to have the specific 
 gravity of hydrogen ; like hydrogen it also burns in the 
 air. The water, in fact, is decomposed by the touching 
 metals ; its oxygen unites with the zinc to form oxide of 
 zinc, while its hydrogen escapes from the platinum. 
 
132 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 4. If the two metals be only partially plunged into the 
 acidulated water, it does not matter whether contact oc- 
 curs within the liquid or outside of it. The effect in both 
 cases is the decomposition of the water, the solution of 
 the zinc, and the liberation of the hydrogen gas. 
 
 5. When the two partially immersed metals arc con- 
 nected outside the liquid by a long wire (say of copper) 
 the effect is the same as when they touch directly. In 
 both cases a circuit is said to be formed, consisting of the 
 two metals and the liquid. In the case last mentioned 
 the copper wire is said to complete the circuit. 
 
 For these experiments a strip of platinum and a strip 
 of amalgamated zinc are employed. The liquid is placed 
 in a glass cell with parallel sides, through which is sent a 
 beam of light, and by means of a lens a magnified image 
 of the cell and its two strips is cast upon a screen. The 
 chemical action consequent upon touching the metals, 
 or on completing the circuit with a wire, and its suspension 
 when contact is interrupted, are then very plainly seen. 
 
 6. The wire is also said to be the vehicle of an electric 
 current which flows round the circuit. It is also called a 
 Voltaic current, because the action here described was 
 discovered by the celebrated Italian philosopher Yolta. 
 These terms, however, convey to ug, as yet, no meaning. 
 Our sole business during the present lecture is to examine 
 the wire which completes the circuit, and to determine 
 wherein it differs from an ordinary wire. 
 
 7. And to enable ourselves to do this effectually, we 
 shall employ an arrangement, or a combination, of zinc 
 and platinum plates and acids, known as a voltaic battery. 
 We shall subsequently analyze this battery, and de- 
 termine what occurs within it. For the present, as afore- 
 said, we shall confine ourselves to the examination of the 
 wire which completes the circuit outside the battery. 
 
ELECTRO-MAGNETISM: ELEMENTARY PHENOMENA. 133 
 
 Electro-Magnetism : Elementary Phenomena. 
 
 8. Interrupting the circuit, and immersing the wire in 
 iron filings, it shows no power of attraction over them. 
 Establishing the circuit, on reimmersing the wire in the 
 filings they cluster round it and cling to it. If the wire 
 be raised out of the filings, they form an envelope round 
 it. The moment, however, the circuit is interrupted, the 
 filings fall. 
 
 9. If the wire be disconnected from the plates of plat- 
 inum and zinc, and stretched under and parallel to a sus- 
 pended bar magnet, no action is observed ; but on mak- 
 ing the wire, stretched beneath the magnet, form part of 
 a voltaic circuit, the magnet is deflected from the mag- 
 netic meridian. This is OErsted's discovery. 
 
 10. To the eye the wire, if tolerably thick, is un- 
 changed by its connection with the zinc and platinum. 
 But if for the thick copper wire a thin platinum wire be 
 substituted it is sensibly heated, and may even be caused 
 to glow brightly. The wire therefore must be the vehicle 
 of some power or condition, which is competent to pro- 
 duce both magnetic and thermal phenomena. 
 
 11. If a naked wire, forming part of a voltaic circuit, be 
 wound round a bar of iron, the power of which the wire 
 was the vehicle is in great part transmitted to the iron 
 which becomes part of the circuit. 
 
 12. But if the wire be overspun with cotton, or still 
 better with silk, this transmission of the power from the 
 wire to the iron bar is prevented. The wire may then be 
 coiled round the bar while the power is compelled to pass 
 in succession through all the convolutions of the wire. 
 Here the iron bar is not at all in the circuit. 
 
 13. But though not in the circuit it is powerfully ex- 
 cited by the surrounding wire. Every convolution of the 
 
134 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 wire evokes a certain amount of magnetism in the bar ; 
 and by rendering the convolutions sufficiently numerous, 
 a magnet of enormous strength may be thus generated. 
 This is Sturgeon's application of Arago's discovery. 
 
 14. Such a magnet is called an Electro-magnet to dis- 
 tinguish it from ordinary permanent steel magnets. When 
 the circuit is broken the power of the electro-magnet 
 ceases. It then falls from its highly-excited condition to 
 the condition of ordinary iron. 
 
 15. For electro-magnetic purposes the covered wire is 
 usually coiled round a hollow reel, several layers of coil 
 being sometimes superposed upon each other. In this 
 condition the reel is called an electro-magnetic helix. The 
 iron bar to be magnetized is placed within the helix, form- 
 ing its core. The electro-magnet may be either straight, 
 shaped like a horseshoe, or it may be caused to assume 
 other forms. 
 
 16. The smooth bar of iron placed across the ends, or 
 poles, of a horseshoe magnet, is sometimes called a keeper, 
 sometimes an armature, and sometimes a sub-magnet. 
 
 17. It is not necessary that the convolutions of the 
 helix should be close to the core. A hoop, for example, 
 a yard in diameter, round which covered wire is coiled, 
 magnetizes an iron bar placed across it at its centre. The 
 magnetized body is here nearly 18 inches from the mag- 
 netizing coil. How is the power transmitted from the one 
 to the other ? Is it an action at a distance, or does it re- 
 quire a medium for its propagation ? I do not know. 
 The question at present profoundly interests investiga- 
 tors. 
 
 18. If a covered wire forming part of a voltaic circuit 
 be coiled round an iron bar near one of its ends, there is a 
 propagation of the excitement along the bar toward the 
 distant end. As the coils augment in number the attrac- 
 
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC ENGINES. 135 
 
 tive power of the distant end increases. On undoing the 
 coils the magnetism gradually falls. The process resem- 
 bles more or less the conduction of heat. The augmenta- 
 tion of the coils answering to the increasing of the tem- 
 perature, and the undoing of the coils answering to the 
 cooling of the end of the bar. 
 
 Electro-Magnetic Engines. 
 
 19. When the end -of a cylinder of iron is partially in- 
 troduced into an electro-magnetic helix, on completing the 
 circuit a force of suction is exerted upon it tending to draw 
 it into the helix. Page turned this force to account in the 
 construction of an electro-magnetic engine. 
 
 Hollow iron cylinders, which pass freely into the 
 helix, are employed for this experiment. The end only 
 of the hollow cylinder being introduced, when the circuit 
 is completed the cylinder is suddenly and strongly 
 sucked in. 
 
 20. Others have turned to account mechanically the 
 attraction exerted by electro-magnetic cores on bars of 
 iron. The distinguished electro-mechanician Froment pro- 
 duced rotatory motion in this way. A series of electro- 
 magnets are so ranged that their poles lie facing each 
 other along the circumference of a circle ; and a series of 
 transverse bars of iron are so connected together as to be 
 able to approach the poles in succession, and rotate as a 
 system. "When the circuit is established, these bars are 
 attracted, motion being thus imparted to the system. The 
 bars on arriving at the poles which attract them suddenly 
 cease to be attracted ; the magnetism being temporarily 
 suspended to allow each bar to pass forward, with the 
 velocity impressed upon it, to the next pair of attracting 
 poles. On reaching these the magnetism is again tem- 
 porarily suspended. Thus the bars are never pulled 
 
136 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 back / and in this way a continuous motion of rotation is 
 maintained. 
 
 21. This rotatory motion can be applied in various 
 ways ; it may, for example, be caused to pump water, to 
 saw wood, or to drive piles. 
 
 One of Froment's electro-magnetic engines, and its 
 application to pumping and pile-driving, is employed to 
 illustrate this. 
 
 Physical Effects of Magnetization. 
 
 22. Sound is one of the physical effects which accom- 
 pany sudden magnetization and sudden demagnetization. 
 An ear placed close to an iron core hears a clink the mo- 
 ment the circuit is established round it. A clink is also 
 heard when the circuit is broken. This is Page's discovery. 
 Employing a contact-breaker (in a distant room to abolish 
 its noise) the coil may be magnetized and demagnetized 
 in quick succession ; the sounds then produced may be 
 heard by several hundreds at once. 
 
 A poker of good soft iron placed within an electro- 
 magnetic helix, and with its two ends supported on wooden 
 trays, produces a very good effect. The sound may be 
 rendered musical. 
 
 23. When an iron bar is magnetized its volume is un- 
 changed, but its shape is altered. It lengthens in the 
 direction of magnetization. This is Joule's discovery. 
 
 24. Joule employed a system of levers to augment the 
 effect, and a microscope to observe the elongation thus 
 augmented. Our method is this : The iron bar is magnet- 
 ized by an electro-magnetic helix which surrounds it. 
 Its elongation is first augmented fiftyfold by means of a 
 lever; and this motion is applied to turn the axis of a 
 rotating mirror. From the mirror is reflected a long beam 
 of light, which forms an index without weight. The re- 
 
PHYSICAL EFFECTS OF MAGNETIZATION. 137 
 
 fleeted beam may be caused to print a circle of light upon 
 a white screen, and this circle when the bar is magnetized, 
 suffers a displacement due to the elongation of the bar. 
 This displacement may amount to a foot or more. 
 
 What is the cause of this elongation ? The discussion 
 of this question requires some preliminary knowledge. 
 
 25. If a sheet of paper or a square of glass be placed 
 over a magnet, iron filings scattered on the paper or on 
 the glass arrange themselves in lines, which Faraday called 
 Lines of Force. Along these lines the filings set their 
 longest dimensions, and they also attach themselves end 
 to end. A little bar of iron, or a small magnetic needle, 
 freely suspended, sets itself also along these lines of 
 force. 
 
 The formation and modifications of the magnetic curves, 
 or lines of force, are shown in this lecture by means of small 
 magnets held between plates of glass and strongly illumi- 
 nated. Magnified images of the curves are thrown upon 
 a screen about 40 feet distant. The shifting of the curves 
 by the tapping of the glass is plainly visible. 
 
 26. We may regard a bar of iron as made up of parti- 
 cles united by the force of cohesion, but still to some ex- 
 tent distinct. When iron is broken we see crystalline 
 facets on the surface of fracture. In fact, the bar is com- 
 posed of minute crystals of irregular shape. These, when 
 the bar is magnetized, try to set their longest dimensions 
 parallel to the direction of magnetization, that is to say, 
 in the direction of the bar itself. They succeed in this 
 effort to some slight extent, and thus produce the minute 
 and temporary lengthening of the bar. This is the ex- 
 planation of De la Rive. It is, I think, as true as it is 
 acute. 
 
 27. Magnetic oxide of iron may be suspended as a 
 powder in water contained in a cylindrical vessel with flat 
 
138 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 glass ends. Let the vessel be surrounded by a coil of 
 covered wire. Looking at a candle through the muddy 
 liquid, and making the coil part of a voltaic circuit, the 
 candle brightens at the moment the circuit is made. 
 Breaking the circuit, dimness again supervenes. This is 
 due to an arrangement of the particles of suspended oxide 
 similar to that of the iron filings. They set their longest 
 dimensions parallel to the beam of light, and thus obstruct 
 its passage less. They also attach themselves end to end, 
 and form lines like the lines of filings. This beautiful ex- 
 periment is due to Grove. 
 
 Projecting a magnified image of the end of the cylin- 
 drical cell on a screen, and sending through it the beam 
 of the electric lamp whenever the circuit is established, 
 an illuminated disk, 2 or 3 feet in diameter, flashes out 
 upon the screen. 
 
 Character of Magnetic Force. 
 
 It is necessary to our further progress to have clear 
 and definite ideas as to the character of the magnetic 
 force. 
 
 28. The magnetic power of a magnet, or of a mag- 
 netic needle, though really distributed throughout its 
 mass, appears to be concentrated at two points near the 
 ends. These points are called the poles of the magnet or 
 needle. 
 
 29. The magnetic power of the earth is doubtless also 
 distributed through the mass of the earth, but a concen- 
 tration similar to that just noticed endows the earth also 
 with magnetic poles. 
 
 30. The action of the earth upon a magnetic needle is 
 this: the north terrestrial pole repels one end of the 
 needle and attracts the other ; the south magnetic pole 
 also attracts one end of the needle and repels the other. 
 
CHARACTER OF MAGNETIC FORCE. 139 
 
 But the end attracted by the north terrestrial pole is re- 
 pelled by the south, while the end attracted by the south 
 is repelled by the north. 
 
 31. Thus to each terrestrial magnetic pole the needle 
 presents two ends which are differently endowed. Two 
 opposite kinds of magnetism may be supposed to be con- 
 centrated at the two ends. In this douUeness of the mag- 
 netic force consists what is called magnetic polarity. 
 
 32. Each of the two distinct 'kinds of magnetism may 
 be regarded as self-repellent. North repels north, and 
 south repels south. But different kinds of magnetism are 
 mutually attractive ; south attracts north, and north at- 
 tracts south. 
 
 33. When a magnet, or a magnetic needle, is suspended 
 with the line joining its poles oblique to the magnetic 
 meridian, the earth's action on the needle resolves itself 
 into what in mechanics is called " a couple," tending to 
 turn the needle into the magnetic meridian. 
 
 34. When the needle is in the meridian, the two forces 
 which constitute the couple are opposite and equal. The 
 tendency to produce rotation then ceases ; the needle is 
 in its position of equilibrium. 
 
 35. When the forces are equal and opposite they must 
 neutralize each other ; no motion of translation of the 
 needle being, therefore, possible. Thus, when the needle 
 is caused to swim on water, or on mercury, it does not 
 move toward either of the terrestrial magnetic poles. 
 
 36. One pole of a bar magnet repels the one end and 
 attracts the other end of a magnetic needle. At the other 
 pole of the magnet the attraction and repulsion are 
 reversed. In the middle of the magnet is the magnetic 
 equator, where neither end of the needle is attracted or 
 repelled. 
 
140 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 Magnetism of Helix : Strength of Electro-Magnets. 
 
 3V. An electro-magnetic helix, even without a core of 
 iron, behaves exactly like a magnet. It attracts iron. 
 Its two ends, moreover, are opposite poles, and between 
 them is a magnetic equator. When, however, a core is 
 placed within the helix, the magnetism of the combined 
 system is far more intense than that of the helix alone. 
 
 38. The strength of a" magnet is measured by its power 
 to deflect a magnetic needle from its meridian ; the mag- 
 netic strength of a helix alone, and of a helix and core 
 combined, are similarly determined. 
 
 39. To obtain the magnetic strength of the core alone, 
 we first determine the strength of the helix alone, then 
 that of the helix and core combined; subtracting the 
 former strength from the latter, we obtain the magnetic 
 strength of the core. 
 
 40. If the cores be thick and formed of good iron, the 
 magnetic strength of the core is exactly proportional to 
 that of the helix. A helix of double power will produce 
 an electro-magnet of double strength ; a helix of treble 
 power, an electro-magnet of treble strength, and so on. 
 Thus by varying the strength of the helix we vary in like 
 degree the strength of the iron core within it. 
 
 Electro-Magnetic Attractions : Law of Squares. 
 
 41. And here an important point arises. When we 
 allow a core of double power to act upon a piece of good 
 iron, nearly but not quite in contact with the core, the 
 attraction of the iron is not doubled, but quadrupled. If 
 the core be of treble power, the attraction is not only 
 trebled, but it increases ninefold. If the magnetic 
 strength of the core be quadrupled, the attraction of the 
 iron is augmented sixteenfold. In fact, the attraction is 
 
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC ATTRACTIONS. 141 
 
 proportional, not to the strength simply, but to the 
 strength multiplied by itself, or to the square of the 
 strength of the electro-magnet. 
 
 We must be very clear as to the cause of this action, 
 and must, therefore, contrast for a moment the magnetic 
 action of hard steel with that of soft iron. 
 
 42. Soft iron is easily magnetized, but it loses its mag- 
 netism when the magnetizing force is withdrawn. Steel 
 is magnetized with difficulty, but it retains its magnetism 
 even after the withdrawal of the magnetizing magnet. 
 
 43. This obstinacy on the part of steel in declining to 
 accept the magnetic state, and this retentiveness on the 
 part of steel when the magnetic condition has been once 
 imposed upon it, are called coercive force. It is not a 
 happy term, but it is the one employed. 
 
 44. Supposing a piece of magnetized steel to possess a 
 coercive force so high as to resist further magnetization, 
 its attraction by an electro-magnet would be directly pro- 
 portional, not to the square of the strength, but simply to 
 the strength of the electro-magnet. 
 
 45. Why, then, does the iron follow the law of the 
 square of the strength ? It is because the magnetic con- 
 dition of the iron is not constant, but rises with the 
 strength of the magnet. When the magnetism of the 
 core is doubled, the magnetism of the iron is also doubled ; 
 when the magnetism of the core is trebled, the magnetism 
 of the iron is trebled. The resultant attraction is found 
 by multiplying the magnetism of the iron by the magnet- 
 ism of the core, and this product is the expression of the 
 law of squares just referred to. 
 
 46. To make the matter clearer, let us figure the mag- 
 netism of the core as due to particles of magnetism, which 
 are introduced into the core in gradually-increasing num- 
 bers. Let us start with a core possessing one magnetic 
 
142 NOTES ON ELECTKICITY. 
 
 particle, and let it act upon a piece of hard steel also pos- 
 sessing one magnetic particle; the resulting attraction will 
 be unity or 1. Let two particles be now thrown into the 
 core : the steel in virtue of its coercive force remains un- 
 changed, but its particle being now pulled by two parti- 
 cles instead of one, the resulting attraction will be 2. If 
 three particles of magnetism be thrown into the core, all 
 of them pulling at the single particle of the steel will pro- 
 duce a treble attraction, and so on. 
 
 47. ISTow let us start with a core possessing, as before, 
 a single particle of magnetism, and with a piece of iron 
 also possessing a single particle generated by the core ; 
 the attraction, as before, is here unity. On introducing 
 two particles into the core, they generate immediately two 
 particles in the iron. But two particles each pulled by 
 twice the force first exerted, makes the attraction four 
 times what it was at the outset. 
 
 It is to be remembered that every particle is attracted 
 as if the other particles were absent. 
 
 48. In like manner, if three particles be thrown into 
 the core, three particles are also generated in the iron. 
 Each of these iron magnetic particles is pulled by the three 
 particles of the electro-magnet ; that is to say, each of the 
 iron particles is pulled with three times the primitive force. 
 But there are three particles so pulled ; hence the attrac- 
 tion is nine times what it was at the outset. 
 
 49. Let us compare this action for a moment with that 
 of gravity. Two masses of matter attract each other with 
 a force which we shall take as our unit. If the one mass 
 be doubled, the attraction is doubled ; if both masses be 
 doubled, the attraction is increased fourfold. If one 
 mass be trebled, the attraction is trebled ; if both masses 
 be trebled, the attraction is increased ninefold. When, 
 therefore, both the masses are doubled and trebled, we 
 
INFERENCE FROM LAW OF SQUARES. 143 
 
 have the law of squares. Now, it is this doubling and 
 trebling, in both cases, of the thing which causes magnetic 
 attraction, which causes it to follow the same law. 
 
 Inference from Law of Squares : Theoretic Notions. 
 
 50. Why do I lead you through these considerations ? 
 Simply to make clear to you, that if " the law of squares " 
 here developed show itself in the action of a magnet upon 
 matter, we may infallibly infer that the condition of that 
 matter is not a constant condition ; but that it rises and 
 falls with the condition of the magnet. Matter thus af- 
 fected is said to be magnetized by influence or by induc- 
 tion. It is attracted or repelled (for we shall come im- 
 mediately to the repulsion of matter by a magnei) in virtue 
 of some condition into which it is temporarily thrown by 
 the influencing magnet. 
 
 51. What then is the thing that causes magnetic attrac- 
 tion? The human mind has long striven to realize it. 
 Thales (600 B. c.) thought that the magnet possessed a 
 soul. Cornelius Gemma in 1535 supposed invisible lines 
 to stretch from the magnet to the attracted body, a con- 
 ception which reminds us of Faraday's Lines of Force. 
 Others thought the iron the natural nutriment of the 
 magnet. Descartes embraced magnetic phenomena in 
 his celebrated theory of vortices, and in our day Clerk 
 Maxwell has worked in this direction. ^Epinus assumed 
 the existence of a magnetic fluid. Coulomb assumed the 
 existence of two fluids, each self-repellent, but mutually 
 attractive. Ampere deemed a magnet an assemblage of 
 minute electric currents, which circulated round the atoms 
 of the magnetized body. These conceptions are some- 
 times exceedingly useful as a means of connection and 
 classification, even when we do not believe them true. 
 William Thomson deduces magnetic phenomena from 
 
144 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 " imaginary magnetic matter," thus giving the mind tne 
 conception while distinctly releasing it from belief. The 
 real origin of magnetism is yet to be revealed. 
 
 Diamagnetism : Magne- Crystallic Action. 
 
 52. Brugmans, in 1778, first observed the repulsion of 
 bismuth by a magnet. In 1827 Le Baillif described the 
 repulsion of antimony. Saigey, Seebeck, and Becquerel, 
 also observed certain actions of the kind. 
 
 53. In 1845 Faraday generalized these observations 
 by demonstrating the magnetic condition of all matter. 
 He showed that bodies divided themselves into two great 
 classes, the one attracted, the other repelled by the poles 
 of a magnet. 
 
 54. To the force producing this repulsion, Faraday gave 
 the name of Diamagnetism. 
 
 What is the nature of this force ? Is it inherent and 
 constant, or is it induced ? 
 
 55. The repulsion of diamagnetic bodies follows accu- 
 rately the law of squares above developed. A double 
 force produces a quadruple repulsion ; a treble force pro- 
 duces a ninefold repulsion, and so on. 
 
 56. Hence we may infer, with certainty, that the con- 
 dition of diamagnetic bodies in virtue of which they are 
 repelled by a magnet, is a condition induced by the mag- 
 net, rising and falling as the strength of the magnet rises 
 and falls. 
 
 57. The force of diamagnetism is vastly feebler than 
 that of ordinary magnetism. Of all diamagnetic sub- 
 stances, for example, bismuth is the most strongly repelled ; 
 but its repulsion is almost incomparably less than the at- 
 traction of iron. According to Weber, the magnetism of 
 a thin bar of iron exceeds the diamagnetism of an equal 
 mass of bismuth about two and a half million times. 
 
FRICTIONAL ELECTTJCITY. 145 
 
 58. Diamagnetic bodies under magnetic excitement 
 exhibit a polarity the reverse of that of magnetic bodies. 
 In all cases, whether we operate with helices or with 
 magnets, or with helices and magnets combined, the 
 actions of magnetic and diamagnetic bodies are anti- 
 thetical. 
 
 59. An iron statue standing erect on the earth's sur- 
 face is converted into a magnet by the earth's magnetism ; 
 a marble statue, or a man standing erect, is converted by 
 the same force into a diamagnet ; for marble is diamag- 
 netic, and so are all the tissues and all the solids and 
 fluids of the human body. The poles of the man are those 
 of the iron statue reversed. 
 
 60. Organic bodies, and most crystals, are magnetized 
 with different degrees of intensity in different directions. 
 They are endowed with axes of magnetic induction. 
 
 61. Thus in the case of Iceland spar (carbonate of 
 lime), the repulsion along the axis is a maximum. In the 
 case of carbonate of iron, a crystal of the same shape and 
 structure as carbonate of lime, the attraction along the 
 axis is a maximum. 
 
 62. The position assumed by a crystal when suspended 
 between the poles of a magnet, depends on its magnetie 
 axes. 
 
 Frictional Electricity : Attraction and Repulsion : Con- 
 duction and Insulation. 
 
 63. By the friction of a woollen cloth amber is en- 
 dowed with the power of attracting light bodies. This 
 substance was called Electron by the Greeks ; hence the 
 name Electricity was applied to the power of attraction 
 exhibited by amber. This attraction remained an isolated 
 fact for more than 2,000 years. 
 
 64. In the year 1600 Dr. Gilbert of Colchester, physi- 
 
 7 
 
146 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 cian to Queen Elizabeth, showed that the power of attrac- 
 tion was shared by many other substances. Dry glass, 
 for example, when rubbed by silk, and dry sealing-wax 
 when rubbed by flannel, exhibit this attractive power. 
 When they do so they are said to be electrified. 
 
 65. An electrified body attracts and is attracted by all 
 kinds of unelectrified matter ; but repulsion may also come 
 into play. Thus, rubbed glass repels rubbed glass, and 
 rubbed sealing-wax repels rubbed sealing-wax ; while 
 rubbed glass attracts rubbed sealing-wax, and rubbed 
 sealing-wax attracts rubbed glass. 
 
 66. Hence the notion of two kinds of electricity: one 
 proper to vitreous bodies, and therefore called vitreous 
 electricity ; the other proper to resinous bodies, and there- 
 fore called resinous electricity. 
 
 67. These terms are improper; because by employing 
 suitable rubbers we can obtain the electricity of sealing- 
 wax from glass, and the electricity of glass from sealing- 
 wax. We now use the term positive electricity to denote 
 that developed on glass by the friction of silk ; and nega- 
 tive electricity to denote that developed on sealing-wax 
 by the friction of flannel. 
 
 68. Bodies endowed with the same electricity repel 
 each other, while bodies endowed with opposite electrici- 
 ties attract each other. This is the fundamental law of 
 electric action. 
 
 69. The rubber and the body rubbed are always en- 
 dowed with opposite electricities. They always attract 
 each other. The work done in overcoming this attraction 
 appears as heat in the electric spark. 
 
 70. To find the kind of electricity with which a body 
 is endowed we must ascertain, by trial, the electricity by 
 which the body is repelled. This, we mayi)e sure, is the 
 electricity of the body. Attraction does not furnish a 
 safe test, because unelectrified bodies are attracted. 
 
THEORIES OF ELECTRICITY. 147 
 
 71 Some substances possess in a very high degree the 
 capacity of transmitting the electric power, or condition ; 
 others possess in a high degree the capacity of intercept- 
 ing it. The former bodies are called conductors, the latter 
 bodies, insulators. 
 
 12. The insulators were formerly called electrics, be- 
 cause they could be electrified by friction when held in 
 the hand. The conductors were called non-electrics, be- 
 cause they could not be so electrified. The division is 
 improper, because if a conductor be insulated it can 
 readily be electrified. To keep it electrified an insulator 
 must be introduced between it and the earth. 
 
 Theories of Electricity : JZZectric Fluids. 
 
 73. What is electricity? Why should it adhere so 
 tenaciously to some substances, and flow so freely through 
 or along others ? The human mind has made many 
 attempts to imagine the inner cause of electric action, and 
 it still continues to make such attempts. Formerly it was 
 thought that magnetism and electricity, as well as light 
 and heat, were all the work of " imponderable matter," 
 associated with the ordinary matter. In the case of light 
 and heat, this conception has undergone profound modi- 
 fication ; and we seem to see clearly the mechanical cause 
 of both. But no similar clearness has as yet been at 
 tained with regard to electricity, though a strong presump- 
 tion exists that our notions of it are destined soon to 
 undergo a modification equally profound. 
 
 74. Meanwhile we may employ the provisional con- 
 ception furnished by the theory of electric fluids. It will 
 enable us to classify our facts, though it is not to be re- 
 garded as demonstrated. 
 
 75. According to this theory, electrical attractions and 
 repulsions arise from two invisible fluids, each self-re- 
 
 . 
 
148 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 pulsive but both mutually attractive. The fluids are 
 supposed to be mixed together to form a compound neu- 
 tral fluid in unelectrified bodies. 
 
 76. The act of electrification, by friction, consists in 
 the forcible separation of the two fluids, one of which is 
 diffused over the rubber, and the other over the body 
 rubbed. But they may also be separated in another way 
 now to be illustrated. 
 
 Electric Induction : the Condenser : the jElectrophorus. 
 
 77. If an electrified body be brought near an insulated 
 unelectrified conductor, but not into contact with it, the 
 electrified body will decompose the compound fluid of the 
 conductor ; attracting one of its constituents and repelling 
 the other. When the electrified body is withdrawn, the 
 separated fluids reunite and neutralize each other. 
 
 78. This forcible separation of the two fluids of a 
 neutral conductor, by the mere proximity of an electrified 
 body, is called electric induction. Bodies in this state are 
 also said to be electrified by influence. Neutral bodies are 
 attracted because they are first excited by induction. 
 
 79. When an insulated conductor is acted on by an 
 electrified body, its repelled electricity is free, but its 
 attracted electricity is held captive by the inducing elec- 
 trified body. Connecting the conductor for a moment 
 with the earth, its free electricity escapes ; and then, on 
 the removal of the electrified inducing body, the captive 
 electricity is liberated and diffused over the surface of the 
 conductor. 
 
 80. Thus by the mere proximity of the electrified body, 
 and without establishing contact between it and the 
 neutral conductor, we can charge the latter with the oppo- 
 site electricity. 
 
 81. Two sheets of tin-foil (conductors) being separated 
 
THE ELECTRIC MACHINE: THE LEYDEN-JAR. 149 
 
 from each other by- a sheet of glass (an insulator), if one 
 sheet have electricity imparted to it, it will act through 
 the glass, and decompose the neutral electricity of the 
 opposite sheet attracting the one constituent and repelling 
 the other. 
 
 82. If the second sheet be connected with the earth 
 "the repelled electricity will flow away, and we shall have 
 
 two mutually attractive layers of electricity separated 
 from each other by the glass. 
 
 83. If the one sheet of tin -foil be united with the other 
 by a conductor,, the two opposite electricities will flow 
 together ; the tin-foil is then said to be discharged. This 
 discharge usually assumes the form of a spark. 
 
 84. If the surface of a cake of resin, or of a sheet of 
 vulcanized india-rubber be electrified, a plate of metal 
 laid upon it will have its neutral fluid decomposed ; its 
 positive fluid being attracted and its negative repelled. 
 On touching the metal plate its free (repelled) electricity 
 flows to the earth ; and now if the plate be raised by an 
 insulating handle, it will appear charged with positive 
 electricity. This is the principle of the Electrophorus. 
 
 TJie Electric Machine : the Ley den-jar. 
 
 85. An Electric Machine consists of two parts : the 
 insulator, which is excited by friction, and the prime con- 
 ductor. 
 
 86. The first electric machine consisted of a ball of 
 sulphur, which was rubbed against the hand. It was in- 
 vented by Otto von Guericke, burgomaster of Magdeburg, 
 in the year 1671. A sphere of glass was afterward intro- 
 duced, then a cylinder of glass, and finally a round glass 
 plate, which was rubbed with dry silk. 
 
 87. The prime conductor is thus charged: When the 
 glass plate is turned by a handle it passes between the silk 
 
150 NOTES ON ELECTEICITY. 
 
 rubbers and is positively electrified. The electrified glass 
 then acts by induction upon the prime conductor, attract- 
 ing the negative electricity and repelling its positive. 
 The conductor is furnished with points, from which the 
 negative electricity streams out against the excited glass. 
 Thus the prime conductor is charged, not by directly 
 communicating to it positive electricity, but by robbing 
 it of its negative, the positive remaining behind. 
 
 88. The arrangement mentioned in Note 81 is virtually 
 a Leyden-jar. Were the plate of glass there referred to 
 moulded into the shape of a jar, one sheet of foil would 
 cover its interior and the other its exterior. When the 
 jar is connected with an electric machine, its charged in- 
 terior coating acts by induction across the glass on the 
 exterior coating, attracting the opposite and repelling the 
 similar electricity. 
 
 89. In the experiment which led to the discovery 
 of the Leyden-jar the hand of the experimentalist served 
 as the outer coating. 
 
 90. The escape of the repefl^d electricity of the outer 
 coating to the earth leaves the cVptive electricity exposed 
 solely to the attraction of that within the jar, and enables 
 the jar to take a strong charge. 
 
 The Electric Current. 
 
 91. When the outer and the inner coatings are con- 
 nected by a conductor, an electric current passes from the 
 one to the other. 
 
 92. The current starts at the same instant from the 
 inner and outer coatings; the middle point of the conduct- 
 or being reached last by the current. This indicates that 
 there are two currents which start at the same moment 
 from the inner and outer coatings. 
 
THE ELECTRIC DISCHARGE. 151 
 
 93. It is agreed to call the direction in which the 
 positive electricity flows the direction of the current. 
 
 The Electric Discharge : Thunder and Lightning. 
 
 94. "When an electric current encounters resistance in 
 its passage, heat is developed : this heat is sometimes so 
 intense as to reduce metals to a state of vapor. 
 
 95. When a body is intensely electrified, it will dis- 
 charge its electricity to an unelectrified body across an 
 interval of air in the form of an electric spark. Two 
 bodies oppositely electrified discharge to each other in the 
 same way. 
 
 96. When two oppositely electrified clouds discharge 
 toward each other, the track of the lightning marks the 
 course of an electric current, and the sound of the thunder 
 is the sound of an electric spark. 
 
 97. An electrified cloud, if it 'come near the earth, may 
 discharge its electricity to the earth jn the*same way. 
 
 98. If the body througli which the atmospheric elec- 
 tricity passes be a good conductor, and of sufficient size, 
 no harm is done; but the resistance offered by trees, 
 houses, and animals, to the passage of the electricity 
 usually causes their destruction. 
 
 99. The nervous system Acquires a certain interval of 
 time to become conscious of pain. The time of an electric 
 discharge is but a small fraction of this interval ; hence 
 as a sentient apparatus the nervous system is destroyed 
 before consciousness can set in. If this be true and there 
 are the strongest grounds for believing it to be true 
 death from lightning must be painless. 
 
 100. When an electrified cloud passes over a pointed 
 lightning-conductor, the opposite electricity of the earth 
 is discharged from the point of the conductor against the 
 
152 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 cloud. The cloud is thus neutralized, and, in general, 
 without producing thunder. 
 
 101. The duration of an electric spark amounts only to 
 an extremely small fraction of a second. On this account, 
 when moving bodies are suddenly illuminated by the 
 spark from a Ley den-jar, they appear to rest for a short in- 
 terval in the position which they occupied when the flash 
 fell upon them. A moving cannon-ball illuminated by a 
 flash of lightning appears to stand still about one-eighth 
 of a second, this being about the interval during which an 
 impression, once made, persists upon the retina. 
 
 102. The unretarded electric spark will scatter gun- 
 powder, but will not ignite it. To produce ignition it is 
 necessary to retard the discharge by sending it through a 
 wet string. 
 
 Electric Density : Action of Points. 
 
 103. If we double the quantity of electricity imparted 
 to the same conductor, the density of the electricity is 
 said to be doubled ; if we treble the quantity, the density 
 is said to be trebled ; and so on. 
 
 104. On a sphere the density of the electricity is the 
 same at all points of its surface ; on a plate the density 
 is greatest at the edges ; and on an elongated conductor 
 the density is greatest at the 'ends. 
 
 105. When the conductor ends in a sharp point the 
 electric density at the point is so great that the electricity 
 discharges itself into the air. 
 
 106. The air thus electrified is self-repellent, and is also 
 repelled by the point, the so-called " electric wind " being 
 produced. 
 
 107. By causing an electric wind to issue from opposite 
 points of a light body, the reaction of the two winds 
 
RELATION OF VOLTAIC TO FRICTIONAL ELECTRICITY. 153 
 
 may make the body to float in stable equilibrium in the 
 air. 
 
 Relation of Voltaic to Frictional Electricity. 
 
 108. The outer ends of two pieces of zinc and platinum, 
 partially immersed in acidulated water, are in opposite 
 electrical conditions. The free platinum end shows posi- 
 tive electricity, while the free zinc end shows negative 
 electricity. 
 
 109. When both plates are united by a wire, the posi- 
 tive flows along the wire toward the negative, and the 
 negative toward the positive. But, as mentioned in 
 Note 93, it is agreed to call the direction in which the 
 positive electricity flows the direction of the current. 
 
 110. The force which urges this current forward (the 
 electro-motive force) is enormously less than that which 
 urges forward a current of frictional electricity. The 
 consequence -is, that the latter is able to surmount resist- 
 ances which are totally un surmountable by the former. 
 
 111. But by linking cells together we cause the voltaic 
 current to approach more and more to the character of 
 the frictional current. It requires, however, a battery of 
 more than a thousand cells to make the current from a 
 voltaic battery jump over an interval of air I6 * 00 th of an 
 inch in length. An electric machine of moderate power, 
 and furnished with a suitable conductor, is competent to 
 urge its current across an interval ten thousand times as 
 great as this. 
 
 112. The electric spark passes through air by the 
 agency of the particles of the conductor from which it 
 springs, and which are carried forward by the discharge. 
 
 113. But measured by other standards the frictional 
 current is almost incomparably more feeble than the vol- 
 taic current. For example: it is not without special 
 
154 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 arrangements for multiplying the effect that the current 
 from a large electrical machine is enabled to deflect a mag- 
 netic needle. 
 
 114. Faraday immersed two wires, the one of zinc and 
 the other of platinum, each -^th of an inch in diameter, in 
 a cell of acidulated water. The depth of immersion was 
 only -|ths of an inch, and the time of immersion only J^ths 
 of a second. Still he found that the electricity generated 
 by this small apparatus, in this brief time, produced a 
 distinctly greater effect upon a magnetic needle than 28 
 turns of the large electric machine of the Royal Institu- 
 tion. 
 
 115. A cubic inch of air, if compressed with sufficient 
 power, may be able to rupture a very rigid envelope ; while 
 a cubic yard of air, if not so compressed, may exert but 
 a feeble pressure upon the surfaces which bound it. Now 
 the electricity of the machine is in a condition analogous 
 to the compressed air. Its density, or, as it fs sometimes 
 called, its intensity, or tension, is great. The electricity 
 from the voltaic battery, on the other hand, resembles the 
 uncompressed air. It exceeds enormously in quantity 
 that from the machine ; but it falls enormously below it 
 in intensity. 
 
 116. The deflection of a magnetic needle and other 
 actions of the voltaic current depend solely upon quantity, 
 hence the vast superiority of the voltaic current in pro- 
 ducing such deflection. 
 
 117. Faraday found the quantity of electricity dis- 
 engaged by the decomposition of a single grain of water 
 in a voltaic cell (see Note 5) to be equal to that liberated 
 in 800,000 discharges of the great Leyden battery of the 
 Royal Institution. This, if concentrated in a single dis- 
 charge, would be equal to a great flash of lightning. He 
 also estimated the quantity of electricity liberated by the 
 
HISTORIC JOTTINGS. 155 
 
 chemical action of a single grain of water on four grains 
 of zinc to be equal in quantity to that of a powerful 
 thunder-storm. 
 
 118. Weber and Kohlrausch have found that the quan- 
 tity of electricity associated with one milligramme of 
 hydrogen in water, if diffused over a cloud 1,000 metres 
 above the earth, would exert upon an equal quantity of 
 the opposite electricity at the earth's surface an attractive 
 force of 2,268,000 kilogrammes.* 
 
 Historic Jottings^ concerning Conduction and the 
 Leyden-jar. 
 
 119. In 1729, Stephen Grey, pensioner of the Charter 
 House, discovered electric conduction. Connecting an end 
 of a wire 700 feet long with a glass tube and supporting 
 the wire on loops of silk, he found that on rubbing the 
 tube the distant end of his wire became electrified and 
 attracted light bodies. He also found that a wire loop did 
 not answer as a support, as the electricity escaped through 
 it ; hence arose the division of bodies into conductors and 
 insulators. Grey's observations were written down by 
 the secretary of the Royal Society the day before his 
 death. 
 
 120. In October, 1 745, Von Kleist, a bishop of Cammin, 
 in Pomerania, charged with electricity a flask containing 
 sometimes mercury, sometimes alcohol. Through a cork 
 in the neck of the flask passed an iron nail, which was 
 brought into contact with the conductor of an electrical 
 machine. On touching the nail Yon Kleist experienced a 
 violent shock. 
 
 121. In January, 1746, Cunseus of Leyden received also 
 a shock, and his experiment was repeated by Allamand 
 
 * The metre is a yard and one-eleventh in length ; the milligramme 
 is - G L 5 th of a grain ; the kilogramme is 2 Ibs. 3^ oz. 
 
156 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 and Musschenbroek. A wire passed from the conductor 
 of the machine into a flask filled with water. Musschen- 
 broek held the flask in the right hand, the machine was 
 turned, and then with the left hand he drew a spark from 
 the conductor. The shock received was, according to 
 Musschenbroek so terrible, that he declared he would not 
 receive a second for the crown of France. Musschen- 
 broek observed that it was only the person who held the 
 flask in his hand that felt the shock. Kleist failed to 
 recognize this condition. 
 
 122. In Germany the jar is sometimes called Kleist's 
 jar, but more commonly, because of the failure just referred 
 to, the Ley den-jar. The theory of it, and other similar 
 apparatus, was given by Franklin in September, 1747. 
 (See Notes 81, 88, 89, 90.) 
 
 123. In 1747, Dr. Watson, Bishop of Llandaff, sent the 
 discharge from a Leyden-jar through 2,800 feet of wire, 
 and through the same distance of earth. Subsequently, in 
 the same year, he sent the discharge through 10,600 feet 
 of wire, supported by insulators of baked wood. The ex- 
 periment was made on Shooter's Hill. 
 
 124. In 1748 similar experiments were made by Frank- 
 lin across the Schuylkill, and by De Luc across the Lake 
 of Geneva. 
 
 Historic Jottings^ concerning the Electric Telegraph. 
 
 125. The first proposal of an electric telegraph was 
 made by an anonymous contributor to the Scot's Maga- 
 zine for 17 53. Various attempts to apply frictional elec- 
 tricity for this purpose were subsequently made. They 
 culminated in the exceedingly ingenious arrangement of 
 Mr. (now Sir Francis) Ronalds, published in 1823. 
 
 126. The voltaic pile was described by Volta in a 
 letter to Sir Joseph Banks, written from Como in 1800. 
 
HISTORIC JOTTINGS. 157 
 
 127. Immediately afterward Nicholson and Carlisle 
 discovered the decomposition of water by the voltaic 
 current. 
 
 128. In 1808 Sommering proposed a system of tele- 
 graphy based on the discovery of Nicholson and Carlisle. 
 A similar system was proposed about the same time by 
 Prof. Coxe, of Pennsylvania. 
 
 129. In 1820 GErsted discovered the deflection of a 
 magnetic needle by an electric current.* 
 
 130. The idea of employing the deflection of the 
 needle for telegraphic purposes occurred to the cele- 
 brated French mathematician, La Place; the problem 
 was partly worked out by Ampere, and still further ad- 
 vanced by Ritchie, Professor of Natural Philosophy in the 
 Royal Institution. 
 
 131. In 1832 Baron Schilling constructed models of a 
 telegraphic apparatus which were exhibited before the 
 Emperors Alexander and Nicholas. 
 
 132. In 1833 Gauss and Weber established an electric 
 telegraph between the Physical Cabinet and the Astro- 
 nomical and Magnetic Observatories of Gottingen, em- 
 bracing a distance of nearly 10,000 feet. Faraday's elec- 
 tricity instead of Volta's was employed by Gauss and 
 Weber. 
 
 133. Steinheil was requested by Gauss to pursue the 
 subject. To the telegraph he made many highly-impor- 
 
 * In his exceedingly useful little book on the Telegraph, published in 
 Weale's "Rudimentary Series," Mr. Robert Sabine quotes the following 
 remarkable passage from a work on magnetism, published in Paris, by 
 Prof. Izarn, in 1804: "D'apres les observations de Romagnesi, physicien 
 de Trente, 1'aiguille deja aimantee, et que 1'on soumet ainsi au courant 
 galvanique, eprouve une declinaison; et d'apres celles de J. Majon, 
 savant chemiste de Genes, les aiguilles non-aimentees acquierent par ce 
 moyen une sorte de polarite magnetique." The work containing this 
 passage was lent to Mr. Sabine by Mr. Latimer Clark! 
 
158 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 tant contributions and suggestions. In 1837 lie had estab- 
 lished a system of wires about 40,000 feet in length, con- 
 necting various points in the city of Munich and its 
 neighborhood. The most considerable discovery of Stein- 
 lieil, and, indeed, one of the most practically important 
 hitherto made in connection with telegraphy, is that the 
 " return wire " between two stations might be dispensed 
 with, and the earth employed in its stead. 
 
 134. In 1834 Wheatstone, by means of a rotating mir- 
 ror, made his celebrated experiments on the velocity of 
 electricity. In the following year he exhibited one of 
 BarOn Schilling's telegraphs in his lectures at King's 
 College. 
 
 135. In 1836 Mr. William Fothergill Cooke saw in the 
 lectures of Prof. Muncke, at Heidelberg, the performance 
 of a similar instrument. Struck by its obvious practical 
 importance, he devised a system of telegraphy, and, in 
 partnership with Wheatstone, dating from June, 1837, 
 succeeded in introducing the telegraphic system into 
 England. 
 
 136. From 1832 to 1836 Morse sought to apply chemi- 
 cal decomposition by the electric current to telegraphic 
 purposes; he abandoned this for his electro-magnetic 
 system devised in 1836. This method consists in stamp- 
 ing, by means of the attraction of an electro-magnet, dots 
 and lines upon a slip of paper caused to move by proper 
 mechanism over the circumference of a wheel. 
 
 137. In 1850 the first submarine cable was laid by 
 Mr. Brett between Dover and Calais. It survived only a 
 day. In 1851 another cable was laid down, which proved 
 successful. 
 
 138. On the 5th of August, 1858, the submergence of 
 the first Atlantic cable was completed, and messages were 
 sent between England and America. The cable ceased 
 
PHENOMENA IN TELEGRAPH-CABLES. 159 
 
 to act on the 4th of September, or about a month after its 
 submersion. 
 
 139. In 1865 the second Atlantic cable was laid and 
 lost. In 1866 a cable was successfully laid, and in the 
 same year the cable of 1865 was recovered. Messages are 
 now sent between England and America at the rate of 
 fourteen words a minute. 
 
 Phenomena observed in Telegraph- Cables* 
 
 140. Davy showed ("Elements of Chemical Philoso- 
 phy," 1812, p. 154) that a Leyden-battery could be charged 
 with voltaic electricity.* 
 
 * Davy thus describes the celebrated battery with which he made 
 this experiment. The spirit to which the battery owed its birth has not 
 diminished among the members of the Royal Institution : " The most 
 powerful combination that exists in which number of alternations is com- 
 bined with extent of surface, is that constructed by the subscriptions of 
 a few zealous cultivators and patrons of science, in the laboratory of the 
 Royal Institution (in 1808). It consists of two hundred instruments, 
 connected together in regular order, each composed of ten double plates 
 arranged in cells of porcelain, and containing in each plate thirty-two 
 square inches ; so that the whole number of double plates is 2,000, and 
 the whole surface 128,000 square inches. This battery, when the cells 
 were filled with 60 parts of water mixed with one part of nitric acid, 
 and one part of sulphuric acid, afforded a series of brilliant and im- 
 pressive effects. When pieces of charcoal about an inch long and one- 
 sixth of an inch in diameter, were brought near each other (within the 
 thirtieth or fortieth part of an inch) a bright spark was produced, and 
 more than half the volume of the charcoal became ignited to whiteness, 
 and by withdrawing the points from each other a constant discharge 
 took place through the heated air, in a space equal at least to four 
 inches, producing a most brilliant ascending arch of light, broad, and 
 conical in form in the middle. When any substance was introduced 
 into this arch, it instantly became ignited ; platina melted as readily in 
 it as wax in the flame of a common candle ; quartz, the sapphire, mag- 
 nesia, lime, all entered into fusion ; fragments of diamond, and points 
 of charcoal and plumbago, rapidly disappeared, and seemed to evapo- 
 
1GO NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 141. Dr. Werner Siemens was the first to employ (in 
 1847) gutta-percha as a means of insulating subterranean 
 telegraph-wires. On the 18th of January, 1850, in a paper 
 communicated to the Physical Society of Berlin, he stated 
 that a subterranean wire covered with gutta-percha, and 
 surrounded by the moisture of the earth, behaved like a 
 colossal Leyden-jar. He also found that ordinary tele- 
 graph-wires charged themselves, though in a much smaller 
 degree than the subterranean wires. 
 
 142. In 1838 Faraday predicted the retardation of the 
 electric discharge by its own inductive action. (" Experi- 
 
 rate in it, even when the connection was made in a receiver exhausted 
 by the air-pump ; but there was no evidence of their having previously 
 undergone fusion. 
 
 " When the communication between .the points positively and nega- 
 tively electrified was made in air, rarefied in the receiver of the air- 
 pump, the distance at which the discharge took place increased as the 
 exhaustion was made, and when the atmosphere in the vessel supported 
 only one-fourth of an inch of mercury in the barometrical gauge, the 
 sparks passed through a space of nearly half an inch ; and by withdraw- 
 ing the points from each other, the discharge was made through six 
 or seven inches, producing a most beautiful coruscation of purple light, 
 the charcoal became intensely ignited, and some platina wire attached 
 to it, fused with brilliant scintillations, and fell in large globules upon 
 the plate of the pump. All the phenomena of chemical decomposition 
 were produced with intense rapidity by this combination. When the 
 points of charcoal were brought near each other in non-conducting fluids, 
 such as oils, ether, and oxymuriatic compounds, brilliant sparks occurred, 
 and elastic matter was rapidly generated ; and such was the intensity of 
 the electricity, that sparks were produced, even in good imperfect con- 
 ductors, such as the nitric and sulphuric acids. 
 
 " When the two conductors from the ends of the combination were 
 connected with a Leyden-battery, one with the internal, the other with 
 the external coating, the battery instantly became charged, and on re- 
 moving the wires, and making the proper connections, either a shock or 
 a spark could be perceived ; and the least possible time of contact was 
 sufficient to renew the charge to its full intensity." 
 
PHENOMENA IN TELEGRAPH-CABLES. 161 
 
 mental Researches," 1333. "Faraday as a Discoverer," 
 new edition, p. 89.) 
 
 143. In 1854 Faraday experimented with cables at 
 the gutta-percha works of the Electric Telegraph Company. 
 One hundred miles of gutta-percha covered wire were im- 
 mersed in water, and a second hundred miles of a similar 
 wire were placed in a dry tank. We will call the former 
 the water wire, and the latter the air wire. 
 
 144. Connecting one pole of a battery with the earth, 
 and connecting the other pole with one of the two insu- 
 lated ends of the water wire, on breaking the connection 
 and touching the wire a powerful shock was received ; the 
 discharge from the wire was also competent to ignite a 
 Statham fuze. When, after having been in contact with 
 the battery, the wire was separated and connected with 
 a galvanometer, the instrument was powerfully affected. 
 
 145. A rush of electricity into the wire was declared 
 by the galvanometer when contact was made ; a rush out 
 of the wire was declared when the wire between the bat- 
 tery and the galvanometer was connected with the earth. 
 None of these effects were observed with the 100 miles of 
 air wire. 
 
 146. Faraday, like Werner Siemens, rightly explained 
 the effect by likening the cable to an enormous Leyden- 
 jar, the wire constituting the interior, the water the ex- 
 terior coating, with the gutta-percha insulator between 
 them. In fact, the surface of the wire in these experi- 
 ments amounted to 8,300 square feet, while the surface of 
 the outer coating of water was 33,000 square feet. To the 
 charge and discharge of this apparatus the effects observed 
 were due. 
 
 147. In a subterranean line of telegraph 1,500 miles 
 long were placed three galvanometers : one, , at the be- 
 ginning of the wire ; a second, #, in the middle ; and a 
 
162 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 third, c, at the end, which was also connected with the 
 earth. 
 
 148. Connecting the battery with the wire of the galva- 
 nometer a, that instrument was instantly affected ; after 
 a sensible time b was affected ; and after a still longer 
 time, c. It required, in fact, two seconds for the electric 
 stream to reach the last instrument. 
 
 149. All the instruments being deflected, when the 
 battery was suddenly cut off at a, that instrument in- 
 stantly fell to zero, b fell subsequently, and c after a still 
 longer interval. 
 
 150. By a brief touch of the battery-pole against #, 
 that instrument was deflected, and could be allowed to 
 fall back into its neutral condition before the electric 
 power had reached b / b in its turn would be affected, and 
 left neutral before the power had reached c. 
 
 151. In this case a wave of force was sent into the wire 
 which gradually travelled along it, appearing in different 
 parts of the wire at successive intervals of time. 
 
 152. It was even possible, by adjusted touches of 
 the battery, to make several successive waves coexist in 
 the wire. 
 
 153. When, after making and breaking contact at a, 
 that galvanometer was connected with the earth, part 
 of the electricity sent into the wire returned, and de- 
 flected a in the reverse direction ; here currents flowed 
 in opposite directions out of both extremities of the wire. 
 
 154. These effects of induction enabled Werner Sie- 
 mens and Faraday to explain the widely-different veloci- 
 ties assigned by different experimenters to the electric 
 current. 
 
 155. To pass through any conductor electricity re- 
 quires time, the time being directly proportional to the 
 lengtJi of the conductor. 
 
ARTIFICIAL CABLES. 163 
 
 156. But in the case of a submarine cable another cause 
 of retardation comes into play, namely, the charging of 
 the cable; the retardation here is proportional to the 
 square of the length of the cable. 
 
 Artificial Cables. 
 
 157. It was to illustrate points like these and to deter- 
 mine the dimensions to be given to the Atlantic cables, 
 that Mr. Cromwell Yarley devised his artificial cables. 
 
 158. In one of these cables a resistance equal to that 
 of a real cable 14,000 miles in length is obtained by intro- 
 ducing into the path of the current feebly-conducting 
 liquids instead of metallic wires. The inductive action 
 is obtained by means of condensers of tin-foil. In another 
 artificial cable coils of wire are employed to give the 
 necessary resistance. 
 
 159. The arrangement described in Note 81 is a con- 
 denser. But those constructed by Mr. Varley are of 
 enormously greater area, the condensing sheets being 
 separated from each other not by plates of glass, but by 
 thin sheets of paper and paraiBne. The vastness of the 
 area and the proximity of the inducing surfaces combine 
 to exalt the effect. 
 
 160. When the condensers themselves are charged by 
 a battery, on discharging them they exhibit phenomena 
 similar to those of a Leyden-jar. The shock, spark, and 
 other effects of frictional electricity, are readily obtained. 
 
 161. A series of 50 condensers, for example, joined " in 
 cascade," that is to say, with the outer coating of each 
 joined to the inner coating of the next, when charged with 
 a battery of 1,000 cells, yield powerful sparks, and defla- 
 grate wires. 
 
 162. If the wire be bent and introduced into a glass of 
 water, the glass is shattered by the discharge. 
 
1G4 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 163. In the 14,000-mile artificial cable are introduced 
 a series of eleven tubes containing the resisting liquid. 
 Into these dip wires. One end of the charging battery is 
 connected with the earth, and the other end can, at will, 
 be connected with the artificial cable. A series of ten 
 galvanometers are placed between the resisting tubes 
 along the artificial cable. 
 
 164. When no condensers are employed, on making 
 connection with the battery all the galvanometers appear 
 to be simultaneously deflected. 
 
 165. When the condenser is introduced between each 
 pair of resisting cells ten condensers in all the current 
 has to charge each condenser to a certain degree be- 
 fore it can sensibly affect the galvanometer beyond the 
 condenser. Hence, when the condensers are attached, 
 the action on the galvanometers is successive, not con- 
 temporaneous. 
 
 166. Mr. Varley supposed his 14,000-mile artificial 
 cable divided into sections representing stations in Lon- 
 don, at Gibraltar, Malta, Suez, Aden, Bombay, Calcutta, 
 Rangoon, Singapore, Java, and Australia. Supposing 
 an actual cable laid, and galvanometers placed at these 
 stations, the deflections obtained on establishing battery 
 contact would be successive. They are represented by 
 the deflections of the galvanometers associated with the 
 artificial cable. 
 
 16V. By varying the resistance and the amount of in- 
 ductive condenser-surface, a representation of any other 
 cable may readily be produced. 
 
 168. Connected with the needle of each of the ten gal- 
 vanometers is a reflecting mirror, from which a brilliant 
 spot of light is cast upon a screen. When the cable is not 
 in action, the ten spots form a row along the same ver- 
 tical line ; when the battery contact is made, the successive 
 
SKETCH OF OHM'S THEORY. 165 
 
 deflections of the galvanometers is declared by the suc- 
 cessive motion of the spots. 
 
 Sketch of Ohm's Theory and KolilrauscK s Verification. 
 
 169. I have already spoken (Note 110) of the force 
 which urges forward the electric current (the electro- 
 motive force). The amount of this force may be deduced 
 from the action of the current, when opposed by different 
 resistances, upon a freely-suspended magnetic needle. 
 
 170. If the wire which carries the current be cut 
 across, the current ceases to flow. The electricity ceases 
 to be dynamic. But at the two ends of the severed wire 
 we have static electricity. 
 
 171. By suitable instruments the amount of this stati- 
 cal charge may be determined ; it increases with the num- 
 ber of elements of the battery. 
 
 172. It is, moreover, proportional to the strength of 
 the current obtained when the wires are reunited. 
 
 173. In this way the statical charge becomes a meas- 
 ure of dynamical action : electricity at rest is connected 
 with electricity in motion. 
 
 174. In experiments on the electroscopic properties of 
 the voltaic circuit it is necessary that the battery should 
 be well insulated. 
 
 175. If the middle point of a wire which connects the 
 two poles of a voltaic battery be connected with the earth, 
 the tension of that point is null. The circuit gradually 
 rises in tension right and left to the two poles of the 
 battery. But on one side of the point we have exclusive- 
 ly positive electricity, while at the other side we have ex- 
 clusively negative electricity. 
 
 176. At equal distances, at opposite sides of the zero- 
 point, the tension is the same. 
 
 177. If any other point than the middle be connected 
 
166 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 at the earth, it becomes the zero-point, right and left of 
 which as before we have the two opposite electricities. 
 
 178. If the negative end of the battery be connected 
 with the earth, the whole wire shows positive electricity ; if 
 the positive end be connected with the earth, the whole 
 wire shows negative electricity. 
 
 179. The wire offers a certain resistance to the passage 
 of the current. The battery itself is also in the circuit, 
 and the current has to overcome its resistance also. But 
 the resistance of the battery may be expressed by a 
 certain length of the external wire. When this is done 
 the sum of the lengths of both wires is called the reduced 
 length of the circuit. 
 
 180. Given the reduced length of the circuit and the 
 electro-motive force, we can determine" by a simple calcula- 
 tion the electric tension of every point in the circuit. 
 
 181. The circuit through which the current flows may 
 be represented by a horizontal line (called an abscissa) ; 
 the electric tension at every point of the circuit may be 
 represented by a vertical line (called an ordinate). If 
 ordinates be drawn to represent the electric tensions at a 
 great number of points of the circuit, the line joining the 
 ends of all the perpendiculars will represent the distribu- 
 tion of electric tension in the circuit. The steepness 
 of this line also represents what Ohm called the electric 
 fall. 
 
 182. More strictly, the electric fall is the decrease in 
 the length of the ordinate for the unit of length of the 
 abscissa. 
 
 183. The total charge of the wire is expressed by the 
 area of the triangle enclosed by the ordinate, abscissa, 
 and line of fall. 
 
 184. The laws of the voltaic circuit as enunciated by 
 Ohm, have been verified everywhere. The electroscopic 
 
SKETCH OF OHM'S THEORY. 167 
 
 state of the circuit has been examined by Kohlrausch, and 
 found to be in strict accordance with Ohm's theory. 
 
 185. Ohm assumed the passage of the electric fluid 
 from one section to another of the connecting wire to be 
 due solely to the difference of electric tension between the 
 two sections ; he further assumed the quantity of electri- 
 city transmitted to be proportional to this difference of 
 tension, and from these fundamental assumptions he de- 
 duced the laws of the voltaic circuit. 
 
 186. These laws may be briefly stated thus : 
 
 . The strength of the current is directly proportional 
 to the electro-motive force. 
 
 b. The strength of the current is inversely propor- 
 tional to the resistance. 
 
 c. If the wire which unites the two poles of battery be 
 of the same material, and of the same thickness through- 
 out, the " electric fall " is the same throughout the wire. 
 
 d. If the wire be of the same material, but of different 
 thicknesses, the " fall " is steeper on the thin wire than on 
 the thick. The " fall " is inversely proportional to the 
 cross-section of the wire. 
 
 e. If the poles be connected by two wires of the same 
 thickness, but of different resisting powers, the electric 
 fall is steepest on the more resisting wire. The " fall " is 
 directly proportional to the specific resistances of the 
 wires. 
 
 187. In verifying these laws Kohlrausch employed a 
 condenser to augment the feeble charges obtained from 
 his voltaic cell, and he held this instrument to be essential. 
 By an exceedingly skilful device Sir Wm. Thomson has 
 rendered the condenser unnecessary, and has thus greatly 
 simplified the means of demonstration. 
 
168 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 Electro-chemistry. Chemical Actions in the Voltaic Cell: 
 Origin of the Current. 
 
 188. Philosophers suppose matter to be made of ele- 
 mentary parts called atoms, which are practically indi- 
 visible. 
 
 189. The elementary atoms can be caused to unite to 
 form compound atoms, which are called molecules. 
 
 190. Thus water is formed of the combination of the 
 atoms of oxygen and hydrogen ; common salt is formed of 
 union of atoms of chlorine and sodium ; potash is formed 
 by the union of the atoms of potassium and oxygen ; the 
 sulphuric acid also which we employed to acidulate our 
 water is formed by the union of atoms of sulphur with 
 atoms of oxygen. 
 
 191. When, as in our first experiment, two strips of 
 zinc and platinum are dipped into acidulated water, the 
 zinc, as we know, exerts a very strong attraction on the 
 oxygen of the water. When the strips are united this 
 attraction triumphs ; the oxygen unites with the zinc, and 
 a voltaic current is established. . 
 
 192. The oxide of zinc here formed combines with the 
 sulphuric acid and forms sulphuric zinc. 
 
 193. By this removal of the oxide from its surface the 
 zinc is kept constantly clean, and thus enabled to attract 
 other atoms of oxygen from the surrounding liquid. 
 During this process the zinc gradually dissolves, and as 
 long as this continues the electric current will flow. In 
 fact, it is the constant dissolution of the zinc that main- 
 tains the permanent current. 
 
 194. The hydrogen of the water, as we have seen, 
 escapes as a free gas from the surface of the platinum, 
 which, unlike the zinc, is not dissolved. 
 
 195. We are not yet quite clear as to the precise way 
 
ELECTRO-CHEMISTRY. 169 
 
 in which the electric current is supported by the solution 
 of the zinc, but the following facts and speculations ought 
 to be known to you. 
 
 196. When two different metals are brought into con- 
 tact, with no liquid between them, one of them charges 
 itself with positive and the other with negative electricity. 
 We have here the famous " contact force " which Volta 
 and his followers considered to be the urging power of the 
 voltaic current. 
 
 197. But the generation of heat, and the performance 
 of mechanical work, by the mere contact of two metals, 
 would be equivalent to a perpetual motion. It would be 
 at variance with the law which requires for the production 
 of any power an equivalent consumption of some other 
 power. 
 
 198. It is, however, a fact that when two different 
 metals touch each other the positive electricity resorts by 
 preference to one metal, and the negative electricity to 
 the other ; the two electricities are as it were attracted 
 differently by the two metals. 
 
 199. This difference of attraction, however, only causes 
 a momentary rearrangement of the two electricities, 
 which pass, when the contact is made, into a new condi- 
 tion of equilibrium. As long as the contact continues this 
 equilibrium is not disturbed ; there is no continuous cur- 
 rent. 
 
 200. We may regard the distinct atoms which enter 
 into the molecules of a compound as charged in a similar 
 manner. For example, the atoms of hydrogen and oxygen 
 when they unite to form a molecule of water, may be 
 looked upon as charged like the two touching metals. 
 This would be the case if the atoms, like the metals, pos- 
 sessed different attractions for the two electricities. 
 
 201. When strips of zinc and platinum are plunged 
 
170 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 in such a liquid, the positively-charged atofn will turn 
 toward the one metal, and the negatively-charged atom 
 toward the other. 
 
 202. But, unless the metals touch each other, electrical 
 equilibrium immediately sets in, a constant state of electric 
 tension being set up at the free ends of the two metals. 
 
 203. The electricity at the ends may be permitted to 
 flow into a condenser, and may be thus stored up ; such a 
 condenser may thus be discharged through a covered wire 
 which passes round a magnetic needle, a deflection of the 
 needle being thus produced. 
 
 204. Thus in. Davy's experiment with his large voltaic 
 battery, wherewith he charged his battery of Leyden-jars, 
 the latter, after having been charged, might be discharged 
 through a galvanometer, a magnetic deflection being thus 
 produced. 
 
 205. But the metals, once relieved of their charge, 
 would immediately reload themselves with electricity, and 
 might be again employed to charge a Leyden battery, and 
 to produce a deflection of a magnetic needle. 
 
 206. At no moment during this process the battery 
 circuit would be complete ; still we should have a succes- 
 sion of magnetic actions similar to those observed with a 
 closed circuit. 
 
 207. In fact, in the closed circuit the solution of the 
 zinc incessantly removes the charged surface of that metal 
 by dissolving it away, and enables the zinc to take a fresh 
 charge ; an incessant effort, never fully satisfied, is made 
 to establish electric equilibrium ; the incessant renewal of 
 the effort maintains the electric current. 
 
 Chemical Actions at a Distance : Electrolysis. 
 
 208. Thus, then, in the cell where the voltaic current 
 is generated chemical action occurs. We have, on the one 
 
CHEMICAL ACTIONS AT A DISTANCE. 171 
 
 hand, the decomposition of the water, and on the other the 
 combination of the zinc with the oxygen and the sulphu- 
 ric acid. 
 
 209. But a voltaic current can also produce chemical 
 action at a distance from its place of generation. This 
 discovery, as stated in Note 127, was made in the year 
 1800 by Nicholson and Carlisle. 
 
 210. We cannot decompose water by a single voltaic 
 cell ; but when two or more cells are united to form a 
 battery, the current from such a battery, when sent 
 through acidulated water, tears asunder the united atoms 
 of oxygen and hydrogen. 
 
 211. The oxygen is set free at the place where the 
 current enters ; the hydrogen is set free at the place 
 where the current quits the liquid. If the direction of the 
 current be reversed, the oxygen and hydrogen instantly 
 change places. 
 
 212. It must be clearly borne in mind that the direc- 
 tion of the current, as already defined, is the direction in 
 which the positive electricity moves. Knowing, therefore, 
 the places at which the oxygen and hydrogen are liber- 
 ated, we can infer with certainty the direction of the cur- 
 rent through the liquid. 
 
 213. For every volume of oxygen liberated in the de- 
 composition of water by a voltaic current, two volumes of 
 hydrogen are set free. 
 
 214. Electro-chemical decomposition is called electro- 
 lysis / and the compound liquid decomposed by the elec- 
 tric current is called an electrolyte. 
 
 215. The electric current formed a powerful means of 
 analysis in the famous experiments of Sir Humphry Davy 
 in 1807. 
 
 216. By operating with the current upon ordinary 
 potash, Davy found the base of this substance to be a 
 
172 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 metal of exceeding lightness, and with an extraordinary 
 appetite for oxygen. When placed on water, it floated 
 on the liquid, and combined with its oxygen. By the 
 heat thus generated the liberated hydrogen was caused to 
 burst into flame. When a globule of the metal was placed 
 on ice, it burned with a bright flame, and the hole made 
 by the heat was filled with a solution of potash. 
 
 217. Soda, treated in the same manner, also yielded a 
 metal resembling that of potash. Thus Davy, by the use 
 of the voltaic current, decomposed the alkaline earths, and 
 greatly expanded our knowledge of chemistry. 
 
 218. To obtain these effects it is necessary to bring the 
 potash and the so.da to a state of fusion by heat. In the 
 solid state they are non-conductors of electricity. In fact, 
 the molecules, when rigid, cannot turn in the manner in- 
 dicated in Note 201. To conduct the current, it is neces- 
 sary that they should thus turn and be decomposed. 
 
 219. When the current is sent through a solution of 
 common salt, it decomposes both the water and the salt. 
 The chlorine of the salt, in company with the oxygen of 
 the water, appears where the current enters the liquid. 
 The sodium of the salt, in company with the hydrogen of 
 the water, appears where the current quits the liquid. 
 
 220. Chlorine possesses powerful bleaching properties ; 
 and if the solution of salt be colored with indigo or litmus, 
 the presence of the chlorine is declared by the destruction 
 of the color. 
 
 221. When a current is sent through a solution of 
 iodide of potassium, the brown substance iodine is set 
 free where the current enters, while the metal potassium 
 is set free where the current quits the solution. The ex- 
 periment may be made by moistening bibulous paper with 
 the dissolved iodide. 
 
 222. In electrolysis it is usual to immerse two plates of 
 
ELECTROLYSIS. 173 
 
 platinum, or of some other suitable substance, in the 
 liquid to be decomposed, and to send the current from 
 plate to plate. The plate at which the current enters the 
 liquid is called the Positive Electrode, the plate at which 
 the current quits the liquid is called the Negative Elec- 
 trode. Without the liquid these electrodes would, as we 
 have already learned, charge themselves with positive 
 and negative electricity. 
 
 223. But inasmuch as electricities which attract each 
 other are of opposite qualities, the substance which is 
 liberated at the positive electrode is called the Electro- 
 ISTegative constituent, while the substance liberated at the 
 negative electrode is called the Electro-Positive constitu- 
 ent of the liquid. 
 
 224. Thus, in the examples above given the oxygen, 
 chlorine, and iodine, are the electro-negative elements ; the 
 hydrogen, sodium, and potassium, being the electro-posi- 
 tive elements. 
 
 225. The terms electro-positive and electro-negative 
 are, however, relative, for a substance may be electro- 
 positive in one combination, and electro-negative in an- 
 other. 
 
 226. If an electric current be conducted through a 
 solution of sulphate of soda, it separates the sulphuric acid 
 from the soda ; the presence of the acid may be proved by 
 its turning a vegetable color red. 
 
 227. When nitrate of silver or acetate of lead is decom- 
 posed by a voltaic current, crystals of silver, or of lead, 
 are deposited on the negative electrode. 
 
 228. The chemical actions of the electric current, some 
 examples of which are here given, constitute what is called 
 Electro-chemistry. 
 
 229. Electro-plating and gilding and the electrotype 
 process are important applications of electro-chemistry. 
 
174 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 Here a chemical compound containing gold, silver, or 
 copper, is decomposed by a voltaic current, the metal 
 being deposited on the surface intended to be coated 
 with it. 
 
 230. If the surface on which the metal is deposited 
 have a design engraved upon it, the lines of the engrav- 
 ing are accurately filled by the metal which, when the 
 deposit is thick enough, may be detached, a perfect copy 
 of the design being thus obtained. 
 
 Measures of the Electric Current. 
 
 231. The tangent-compass, devised by Weber, con- 
 sists of a vertical ring of brass or copper, in the centre of 
 which swings a small compass-needle. The ring being 
 placed in the magnetic meridian, the needle is deflected 
 when a current is sent round the ring. The strength of 
 the current can be proved to be proportional to the tan- 
 gent of the angle of deflection ; hence the name of the 
 instrument. 
 
 232. The voltameter is an instrument devised by Fara- 
 day to measure the strength of an electric current. It 
 consists of a graduated tube which receives and measures 
 the quantity of gas generated by the current in a given 
 time. 
 
 233. The strengths of a series of currents measured by 
 the voltameter are accurately proportional to the same 
 strengths measured by the tangent-compass. Placing a 
 tangent-compass and a voltameter in the same series of 
 circuits, the tangents of the angles observed in the one 
 case are accurately proportional to the quantities of gas 
 generated in the other. 
 
ELECTRIC POLARIZATION. 175 
 
 Electric Polarization : Hitter's Secondary Pile. 
 
 234. When an electric current is sent through acidu- 
 lated water a film of oxygen covers the positive electrode, 
 and a film of hydrogen covers the negative electrode. 
 One of these two substances being electro-positive, and the 
 other electro-negative, they act in the liquid like two dif- 
 ferent metals ; the hydrogen plays the part of zinc, and 
 the oxygen plays the part of platinum. 
 
 235. Interrupting the primary battery circuit, and 
 uniting together the two plates covered with their respec- 
 tive films, an electric current is obtained. 
 
 236. The direction of this current is from the hydro- 
 gen film to the oxygen film in the liquid, and from the 
 oxygen film to the hydrogen film through the connecting 
 wire. 
 
 237. Two electrodes thus covered with condensed 
 gaseous films are said to be polarized; and the currents 
 obtained from them are called currents of polarization. 
 
 238. Now the battery current being always from 
 oxygen to hydrogen (see Note 211), it is plain that the 
 current of polarization is always opposite in direction to 
 the battery current employed to polarize the electrodes. 
 
 239. When a decomposition cell with platinum plates 
 is introduced into a voltaic circuit, it is found that the 
 battery current, though strong at starting, gradually 
 sinks. This sinking is due to the gradual development 
 of the antagonistic current of polarization. 
 
 240. Also in the cells of the battery itself this current 
 of polarization may come prejudicially into play. When 
 two metals, say zinc and platinum, and one liquid, say 
 acidulated water, are employed, the platinum plate is 
 coated with a film of hydrogen. 
 
 241. This hydrogen, being electro-positive, resembles 
 
176 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 a plate of zinc, so that when it is present we Lave, as it 
 were, zinc opposed to zinc in the battery. 
 
 242. Were both plates actually of zinc, we could have 
 no current ; and with the hydrogen film which approxi- 
 mates to zinc we have only a feeble current. To get 
 the full effect of the zinc and platinum some means must 
 be devised to remove from the platinum its film of hy- 
 drogen. 
 
 243. This is effected in Grove's battery by the em- 
 ployment of two liquids. The one is strong nitric acid, 
 which contains the plate of platinum ; the other is dilute 
 sulphuric acid, which contains the plate of zinc. The 
 nitric acid is placed in a vessel of porous earthenware, 
 which becomes saturated with the liquid and allows the 
 current to pass through it. 
 
 244. When the current passes, the hydrogen liberated 
 at the platinum electrode in Grove's cell is instantly oxi- 
 dized by the nitric acid, and prevented from forming a 
 film upon the surface of the platinum. 
 
 245. If instead of employing a single decomposition 
 cell and a single pair of platinum electrodes, we employ a 
 series of such cells, and send the same current through 
 them all, we convert every pair of such plates into an ac- 
 tive voltaic couple ; and if the number of such couples be 
 great, effects of great intensity may be obtained. 
 
 246. If instead of using decomposition cells we simply 
 employ a series of plates of the same metal, say a series 
 of half-crowns, separated from each other by pieces of 
 bibulous paper or by bits of cloth wetted with acidulated 
 water ; on sending a voltaic current through such a pile 
 of plates, we liberate on one of the surfaces of each plate 
 a film of oxygen, and on the other surface a film of hydro- 
 gen. These play the part of the two different metals in 
 the pile of Yolta. 
 
FARADAY'S ELECTROLYTIC LAW. 177 
 
 247. The electro-motive force of such a pile maybe far 
 greater than that of the battery which charges it. It may 
 produce a far more brilliant spark, and urge its current 
 against resistances which would be quite insuperable to 
 the original battery current. 
 
 248. The discoverer of this form of pile was Bitter ; it 
 is sometimes called the secondary pile, to distinguish it 
 from the battery which charges it. 
 
 Faraday's Electrolytic, Law. 
 
 249. When the self-same current is sent through a 
 series of cells containing various compound liquids, the 
 same amount of liquid is not decomposed in all cases. 
 
 250. Let the current be sent in succession through a 
 series of cells containing water, oxide of lead, chloride of 
 lead, iodide of lead, and chloride of silver ; then taking 
 them in the above order, the weights of the liquids de- 
 composed are represented by the numbers 9, 111.5, 139, 
 230.5, 143.5. 
 
 251. The question now is, how are these weights of the 
 respective substances divided between the two electrodes? 
 Supposing the numbers to express grains, we should have 
 the following division between the electrodes : 
 
 At the positive electrode. At the negative electrode. 
 
 Water 8 grains oxygen. ... 1. grain hydrogen. 
 
 Oxide of lead. . . 8 " " 103.5 grains lead. 
 
 Chloride of lead. 35.5 " -chlorine... 103.5 " " 
 
 Iodide of lead.. 127 " iodine 103.5 " " 
 
 Chloride of silver 35.5 " chlorine... 108 " silver. 
 
 252. Now these numbers express the combining pro- 
 portions of the respective substances ; by the electric 
 current in all cases the law of combination as regards 
 quantity is exactly inverted. The substances combine in 
 equivalent proportions ; they are decomposed in precisely 
 
178 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 the same proportions. This is the celebrated law of elec- 
 trolysis discovered by Faraday. 
 
 253. In no case in the body of the electrolyte is any 
 decomposition observed; in no case is any gas there liber- 
 ated. The substances set free appear at the electrodes, 
 and there alone. 
 
 254. Taking water as an illustration, the process is to 
 be figured thus : When the electrodes, charged with elec- 
 tricity from the battery, are plunged into the liquid, the 
 oxygen atom of the water turns toward the positive, and 
 the hydrogen atom toward the negative electrode. 
 
 255. If the electro-motive force be strong enough, the 
 oxygen is torn away from its hydrogen ; the free hydro- 
 gen immediately converges its attraction on the next 
 adjacent oxygen atom, and unites with it, dislodging at 
 the same time the hydrogen with which that atom 
 had been previously combined. Another atom of hydro- 
 gen is thus liberated, which in its turn decomposes the 
 adjacent water-molecule. Thus through the chain of 
 molecules run a series of decompositions, followed by im- 
 mediate recompositions, until the negative electrode is 
 reached. Here the hydrogen, having no further oxygen 
 with which to combine, is liberated as a gas. This is the 
 theory of Grotthuss, which at all events fairly embraces 
 the facts. 
 
 NobilPs Iris Rings. 
 
 256. The hardness of steel in tempering it is judged 
 by its color, which is due to a film of oxide overspreading 
 the steel. The oxide which forms on the surface of molten 
 lead also shows vivid colors. 
 
 257. These are the colors of thin plates investigated 
 by Newton and explained by Thomas Young. 
 
 258. By electro-chemical decomposition Nobili pro- 
 
DISTRIBUTION OF HEAT IN THE CIRCUIT. 179 
 
 ciuced such colors in a very beautiful* manner. Placing, 
 for example, a polished steel plate in a dilute solution of 
 acetate of lead, and connecting the plate with the positive 
 pole of a voltaic battery, on dipping the end of a wire 
 connected with the negative pole into the solution, the 
 peroxide of lead is liberated on the surface of the steel 
 immediately under the wire ; and a film gradually dimin- 
 ishing in thickness spreads from that point outward. 
 Round this point we have a series of concentric circles 
 showing vivid iris colors. 
 
 259. These colors, like all those of thin plates, depend 
 upon the thickness of the film, which diminishes as the 
 distance traversed by the current increases. 
 
 (Du Bois-Reymond has shown that when the point 
 from the negative end of the battery is very near the 
 steel plate, the thickness of the film corresponding to the 
 different circles is inversely proportional to the cubes of 
 their radii.) 
 
 Distribution of Heat in the Circuit. 
 
 260. When the two ends of a voltaic battery are con- 
 nected by a thick wire of good conducting material the 
 wire is not sensibly heated ; the heat due to the oxidation 
 of the zinc is in this case confined to the battery itself. 
 
 261. But if the two ends of the battery be connected 
 by a wire that offers a resistance to the current, the wire 
 is heated, and may, if properly chosen, be raised to a 
 white heat. 
 
 262. Considering the battery as the hearth where the 
 zinc is burnt, we might be led to infer that the heat due 
 to the combustion of the zinc is liberated on the hearth 
 itself, and that its amount depends solely upon the quanti- 
 ty of zinc consumed. 
 
 263. This, however, is not the case. Let the battery, 
 
180 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 with its two ends united by a thick wire, be surrounded 
 by a vessel of water, to which the heat developed by the 
 oxidation say of an ounce of zinc is communicated ; the 
 quantity of heat developed is measured by the rise of 
 temperature of the water. 
 
 264. Let the battery, with its two ends united by the 
 resisting wire, be placed in the same vessel, and let the 
 heat generated in the battery by the oxidation of an ounce 
 of . zinc be again determined ; this heat will be less than 
 that observed in the last experiment. 
 
 265. If the connecting wire be now enclosed in a sepa- 
 rate vessel, and if the heat generated in the wire be thus 
 determined, on adding this amount of heat to that lib- 
 erated in the battery, a total heat is obtained exactly 
 equal to that generated in the battery alone, when the 
 good conducting wire was employed. 
 
 266. In fact, the absolute amount of heat generated by 
 the oxidation of an ounce of zinc is perfectly constant ; 
 but it may be distributed in various proportions between 
 the battery and the external circuit. 
 
 Relation of Heat to Current and to Resistance. 
 
 267. On what does heat developed in a wire uniting 
 the two ends of a voltaic battery depend ? 
 
 268. It depends, in the first place, on the strength of 
 the current, but it is not simply proportional to that 
 strength. 
 
 269. Let the strengths of a series of currents, deter- 
 mined either by the tangent-compass or the voltameter, 
 be represented by the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, then the quanti- 
 ties of heat developed in the same wire by these respec- 
 tive currents are expressed by the numbers 1, 4, 9, 
 and 16. 
 
MAGNETO-ELECTRICITY. 181 
 
 270. The heat generated is therefore proportional to 
 the square of the strength of the current. 
 
 271. Preserving the strength of the current constant, 
 the heat generated is proportional to the electrical re- 
 sistance of the wire through which it passes. These im- 
 portant principles were established by Joule. 
 
 272. Thus if one of two equal currents pass through a 
 silver wire, and the other through a platinum wire of the 
 same length and thickness, the heat generated in the 
 platinum will be ten times that generated in the silver, 
 because the resistance of the former is ten times that of 
 the latter. To urge the current through the platinum in 
 this case would, however, require greater battery-power 
 than that necessary for the silver. 
 
 273. Hence, when the same current is sent through a 
 wire composed of alternate lengths of silver and platinum 
 of equal thickness, the platinum spaces may be raised to 
 a white heat, while the silver is not raised to the faintest 
 glow. 
 
 Magneto-Electricity: Induced Currents. 
 
 274. In a conductor near to, but not in contact with a 
 voltaic circuit, a current is aroused when the circuit is 
 established. "When the circuit is interrupted a current is 
 also aroused in the conductor. 
 
 275. Thus, supposing the voltaic circuit to be bent 
 into the shape of a ring ; and that a second ring, not in 
 the circuit, is placed near the first : at the completion, and 
 at the interruption of the circuit, a current will run round 
 the second ring. 
 
 276. The two currents in the second ring are called 
 secondary currents. They are of momentary duration. 
 They impart, in passing, a shock to. a magnetic needle 
 round which they are sent, and by the motion of which 
 
182 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 their existence is demonstrated. But they vanish imme- 
 diately, being quenched by the resistance of the ring and 
 converted into heat. 
 
 277. These two momentary currents flow in opposite 
 directions through the ring. The secondary current, ex- 
 cited on making the circuit, is opposed in direction to the 
 primary exciting current; that started on interrupting 
 the circuit flows in the same direction as the primary. 
 
 278. These secondary currents are called induced cur- 
 rents. They were discovered by Faraday in 1830, and 
 described by him in his Philosophical papers for 1831. 
 
 279. If, instead of employing a single ring, we make 
 use of an electro-magnetic helix, every coil of the helix 
 will furnish its quota of current, and the sum total of effect 
 is much greater than when only a single ring or coil is 
 employed. 
 
 For the following experiments, two flat spirals, each 
 formed of covered copper wire, are used. 
 
 280. One of the spirals is laid flat upon a table, its two 
 ends being connected with a galvanometer; the other 
 spiral is connected with a voltaic battery, with which the 
 connection can be established or broken at pleasure. Let 
 us call this the inducing or primary spiral, and that con- 
 nected with the galvanometer the secondary or induced 
 spiral. 
 
 281. Laying one spiral upon the other, on sending a 
 current through the primary, the needle of the galva- 
 nometer is suddenly driven aside by the current induced 
 in the secondary ; but the force which acts upon the needle 
 passes away in an instant, the needle returning to its first 
 position. 
 
 282. On interrupting the current the needle also re- 
 ceives a shock, being deflected in the opposite direction. 
 It thus declares the existence of a second temporary cur- 
 
MAGNETO-ELECTRICITY. 1 83 
 
 rent in the secondary spiral. The directions of these two 
 currents, with reference to that of the primary, have been 
 already indicated; Note 277. 
 
 283. Holding the secondary spiral at a distance from 
 the primary with the current flowing through the latter ; 
 on causing the secondary spiral to approach the primary, 
 a. current is aroused; this current ceases the moment the 
 motion toward the primary ceases. 
 
 284. On withdrawing the secondary spiral from the 
 primary, a current is also aroused; this current also ceases 
 the moment the motion of withdrawal ends. 
 
 285. The current excited by approach is opposed in 
 direction to the primary ; the current excited by with- 
 drawal is in the same direction as the primary. 
 
 286. Two electric currents flowing in the same direc- 
 tion attract each other ; if they flow in opposite directions 
 they repel each other. 
 
 287. Hence, to make the secondary spiral approach its 
 primary, we have to overcome a repulsion y while to with- 
 draw the secondary from the primary we have to over- 
 come an attraction. Thus in order to produce these in- 
 duced currents we must expend mechanical force. 
 
 288. The force thus expended appears as heat in the 
 secondary wire after the cessation of the induced current. 
 It is the mechanical equivalent of that heat. 
 
 289. The approach of a magnetic pole to the second- 
 ary spiral and the withdrawal of the pole from the same 
 spiral also arouse induced currents. But, as before, it is 
 only during the periods of approach and withdrawal that 
 the current appears. 
 
 290. Thus by the mere motion of a magnet, and with- 
 out any battery or machine, electric currents may be 
 produced. 
 
 291. Every change of the magnetic condition of the 
 
184 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 space near a secondary coil, or within it, produces an in- 
 duced current in the coil. If the change be an augmenta- 
 tion of magnetism, the current is in one direction ; if it be 
 a diminution of magnetism, the current is in the opposite 
 direction. 
 
 292. When a long secondary coil surrounds a primary 
 coil with a core of iron, by breaking and making the cir- 
 cuit of the primary in rapid succession, a series of power- 
 ful discharges may be obtained. An automatic apparatus 
 is usually employed to make and break the circuit. 
 
 293. Such Induction Coils have been constructed with 
 great skill by Ruhmkorff, and are, therefore, sometimes 
 called Ruhmkorff 's coils. Mr. Apps has recently produced 
 induction coils of astonishing power. 
 
 294. The power of a coil depends mainly on the per- 
 fection of the insulation of its coils. The induced cur- 
 rents in a Ruhmkorff's coil may possess thousands of 
 times the electro-motive force of the primary which ex- 
 cites them. They are able, for example, to overleap as 
 sparks, distances thousands of times greater than that 
 possible to the primary. 
 
 Relation of Induced Currents to the Lines of Magnetic 
 Force. Rotatory Magnetism. 
 
 295. The foregoing phenomena and principles were all 
 laid bare by Faraday. He also established most important 
 relations between his induced currents and the lines of 
 force surrounding a magnet. See Note 25. 
 
 296. He proved that when a conductor moves along 
 the lines of force no induced currents appear ; but that 
 when it moves across the lines of force such currents are 
 generated. 
 
 297. He proved, for example, that when a metal disk 
 
ROTATORY MAGNETISM. 185 
 
 is caused to rotate so as to be tangent to the lines of 
 force, no current appears ; while when the disk, in its rota- 
 tion, cuts the lines of force, currents flow along the disk, 
 from the centre to the circumference and from the circum- 
 ference to the centre. Closed circuits are thus established 
 in the disk. 
 
 208. This, in fact, is the "Magnetism of Rotation," 
 discovered by Arago in 1820, which received complete 
 explanation at the hands of Faraday. 
 
 299. Faraday showed that the lines of force of terres- 
 trial magnetism suflice to produce induced currents when 
 they are intersected by the rotating disk. In fact, all the 
 efiects of magneto-electric induction may be obtained 
 from the magnetism of the earth. 
 
 300. When a conductor rotates round an axis which 
 is parallel to the lines of force, it experiences simply the 
 resistance due to the friction of the air ; but if the axis 
 of rotation be transverse to the lines of force, the rotation 
 is retarded by the interaction of the magnet and the in- 
 duced currents. 
 
 301. This retardation may become so powerful as in- 
 stantly to arrest the rotation. If, for example, a cube or 
 sphere of copper suspended from a twisted string be 
 caused to spin, by untwisting, between the poles of an un- 
 excited electro-magnet, it experiences the retardation 
 due to air friction only ; but on the supervention of the 
 magnetic force the rotation is suddenly arrested. Fara- 
 day also showed that in passing a plate of copper rapidly 
 to and fro Jbetween the magnetic poles you seem to be 
 cutting cheese, though nothing is visible. It is as if pure 
 space were a kind of solid. 
 
 302. If by mechanical means the conductor be com- 
 pelled to rotate or to move to and fro between the excited 
 poles, it will be heated. Joule first demonstrated this ; 
 
186 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 but a very striking demonstration of it was given by 
 Foucault, who heated his celebrated gyroscope in this 
 way. The heat is readily rendered sufficiently intense to 
 melt fusible metal. Between the unexcited poles no effect 
 of this kind is produced. 
 
 303. The repulsion set up by induced currents be- 
 tween the helices and the moving masses of iron in an 
 electro-magnetic engine, would of itself limit the practi- 
 cal application of electricity as a motive power. Never- 
 theless, though such engines speedily reach the limit of 
 their action, the conversion of molecular force into me- 
 chanical effect may be rendered far more perfect than in 
 the case of the steam-engine. 
 
 The JEJxtra- Current. 
 
 304. If the secondary coil of a Ruhmkorff's machine 
 have its ends united, the secondary circuit being then 
 complete, the spark obtained in breaking the primary is 
 small. On separating the two ends of the secondary the 
 primary spark is instantly augmented. 
 
 305. The diminution of the spark is due to the reac- 
 tion of the completed secondary circuit upon the primary. 
 When the secondary circuit is interrupted this reaction 
 ceases. 
 
 306. The primary circuit in its turn can, when com- 
 plete, react upon the secondary. It is complete when- 
 ever contact is made by the automatic contact-breaker. 
 A great enfeeblement of the secondary current is the 
 consequence. When the primary circuit is interrupted 
 the reaction does not exist; there is no enfeeblement, 
 the full power of the secondary being developed. It is 
 on this account that in Ruhmkorff's coil we obtain dis- 
 charges in a single direction only, instead of discharges 
 alternating in direction. 
 
THE EXTRA-CURRENT. 187 
 
 307. The reaction here referred to connects itself with 
 what is called the extra-current. 
 
 308. When a current is sent through a single primary 
 coil, the primary current excites in the wire which carries 
 it, a secondary current opposed in direction to the primary. 
 The primary arouses an antagonist in its own path, which, 
 however, immediately disappears. 
 
 309. When the primary circuit is broken, a secondary 
 current of momentary duration, and having the same 
 direction as the vanishing primary, is evoked in the 
 coil. 
 
 310. Each of the two currents evoked in the primary 
 circuit itself, at the commencement and at the cessation 
 of the primary current, has been called by Faraday an 
 extra-current. 
 
 311. The spark obtained on breaking the primary cir- 
 cuit is augmented in brilliancy and power by the extra- 
 current. 
 
 312. If a second circuit be associated with the primary ; 
 if, for example, two covered wires are wound round the 
 same reel ; on making one of them a primary circuit we 
 have the brilliant spark due to the extra-current, as long 
 as the ends of the second coil remain unconnected. 
 
 313. But the moment they are connected the extra- 
 current in the primary circuit disappears ; there is an in- 
 stant reduction in the brilliancy of the spark. 
 
 314. This is an example of the reaction referred to in 
 Note 304. By the closing of the secondary circuit the 
 extra-current is formed in it instead of in the primary one. 
 Here, in fact, the extra-current becomes an ordinary in- 
 duced current ; it is only so long as it remains in the 
 primary circuit that its distinctive name is applied to it. 
 
188 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 Influence of Time on Intensity of Discharge. The 
 Condenser. 
 
 315. The intensity of the secondary current its "dis- 
 charging distance," for example depends upon the ra- 
 pidity with which the primary is interrupted. 
 
 316. I have already referred to the passage of particles 
 between the two severed terminals of a circuit. By these 
 particles the current may be kept up for a short time after 
 the terminals have been disunited. A gradual dying away 
 of the primary is the consequence. 
 
 317. But to produce the maximum secondary intensity 
 it is necessary that the primary should be extinguished at 
 once. 
 
 318. This is very effectually accomplished if the pri- 
 mary be broken between the poles of a strong magnet. 
 The secondary spark may be thus made to overleap dis- 
 tances, vast in comparison with those possible to it when 
 the rupture of contact occurs far away from the magnetic 
 poles. 
 
 319. The magnet quenches immediately the stream of 
 particles which accompany the spark. Thus, instead of 
 being spread over a very sensible interval, the whole 
 power of the primary is concentrated into an instant of 
 time. 
 
 320. This concentration is announced by the loudness 
 of the report of the primary spark. This augmentation 
 of loudness was first observed by Page ; it was explained 
 by Eijke, who also exalted in the way here indicated the 
 discharge of the secondary coil. 
 
 321. The injurious effect of the spark produced by the 
 rupture of contact in Ruhmkorff's coil is much diminished 
 by the employment of a condenser, which is attached to 
 the primary. It was introduced by Fizeau. 
 
ELECTRIC DISCHARG. 189 
 
 Electric Discharge tJirough Rarefied Gases and Vapors. 
 
 322. The eleetricity from, the prime conductor of an 
 electrical machine passes through the air in the form of a 
 dense and brilliant spark, which produces a very audible 
 report. 
 
 323. When the discharge passes through rarefied air 
 the discharging distance is augmented, and by sufficiently 
 rarefying the air the discharge may be caused to pass 
 silently. It then fills the tube through which it passes 
 with a rosy light. 
 
 324. This rosy light has the same origin as that of 
 the Aurora Borealis ; it is due to the nitrogen of the air. 
 
 325. Every attenuated gas has its own characteristic 
 color when traversed by the electric discharge. When 
 examined by a prism the color resolves itself into distinct 
 bands ; the nature of the gas may, indeed, be inferred from, 
 the analysis of its spectrum. 
 
 326. The discharge of the induction coil through at- 
 tenuated media produces luminous effects similar to those 
 produced by the electric machine. 
 
 327. The tubes containing the attenuated gases or va- 
 pors are usually called vacuum tubes. Through the tubes 
 pass platinum wires which are fused into the glass, and 
 between which the discharge passes. 
 
 328. Such tubes are produced in great perfection by 
 Geissler, of Bonn, and are sometimes called Geissler's 
 tubes. 
 
 329. Under certain circumstances, the luminous dis- 
 charge is composed of distinct luminous strata separated 
 from each other by dark intervals transverse to the direc- 
 tion of the discharge. These strata were first observed 
 by Grove ; they were observed independently and finely 
 developed by Ruhmkorff. 
 
190 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 330. The luminous strata were believed to arise from 
 the intermittent action of the contact-breaker of the in- 
 duction coil ; but Gassiot produced them both with the 
 electric machine, and with his battery of 3,500 cells, where 
 no contact-breaker is employed. 
 
 331. Every single discharge of the induction coil 
 through a properly-chosen medium resolves itself into a 
 series of pulses, which declare themselves as a stratified 
 discharge. Under similar circumstances the discharge 
 from the voltaic battery also is resolved into a series of 
 pulses which are declared by their stratifications. 
 
 Action of Magnets on the Luminous Discharge. 
 
 332. The luminous discharge is to all intents and pur- 
 poses an electric current, and is acted on by a magnet like 
 a wire carrying a current. 
 
 333. But the flexibility of the luminous current in 
 rarefied gases enables the magnet to act upon it in a man- 
 ner peculiarly interesting and instructive. 
 
 334. Placing, for example, a tube through which the 
 luminous discharge is passing between the poles of an 
 electro-magnet, by .exciting the magnet the stream of 
 light may be either deflected or wholly extinguished. 
 
 335. In the latter case, by interrupting the current 
 passing round the magnet, or by lifting the tube out of 
 the magnetic field, the luminous discharge is restored. 
 
 336. In certain cases, when the luminous discharge 
 consists simply of a feeble glow, the supervention of the 
 magnetic force draws a series of strongly-illuminated 
 strata from the positive terminal of the vacuum-tube ; 
 when the magnetism is interrupted, these strata retreat 
 again in succession, as if swallowed up by the positive 
 pole. A number of exceedingly beautiful experiments of 
 this character has been made by Gassiot. 
 
MAGNETO-ELECTRIC MACHINES. 191 
 
 337. It has been stated in Note 306 that the dis- 
 charges from the induction coil proceed always in the 
 same direction ; hence, in each vacuum-tube we have a 
 positive terminal or pole, and a negative terminal or 
 pole. 
 
 338. When the light surrounding the negative ter- 
 minal is subjected to a magnet, it ranges itself exactly 
 along the lines of magnetic force ; the light at the posi- 
 tive terminal shows no such action. This discovery is due 
 to Plticker. 
 
 Magneto-electric Machines. Saxton^s Machine. Siemens* 's 
 Armature. 
 
 339. Faraday's discovery of Magneto-electricity was 
 announced in 1831. In 1833 a machine was constructed 
 by Saxton for the more copious development of magneto- 
 electric currents. 
 
 340. In it copper-wire coils, within which were placed 
 cores of iron, were caused to rotate before the poles of a 
 powerful magnet. 
 
 341. On the approach of a coil to one of the poles of 
 the magnet, a powerful current, whose direction depended 
 on the nature of the pole, was induced in the coil. When 
 the coil retreated from the magnetic pole, a current in the 
 opposite direction was induced. This production of op- 
 posite currents by approach and withdrawal has been 
 already referred to in Notes 283, 284. 
 
 342. By means of an instrument called a commutator, 
 which reversed one of the induced currents at the proper 
 moment, the opposite currents were caused to flow in the 
 same direction. 
 
 343. The cores of soft iron and their associated coils 
 constitute what is called an armature. In Saxton's arma- 
 ture the coils were wound transversely to the iron cores. 
 
192 NOTES ON ELECTRICITY. 
 
 344. But by winding his coils longitudinally, or parallel 
 to the axis of the core, and placing the armature so formed 
 between the poles of a series of horseshoe magnets, Siemens 
 obtained magneto-electric currents much more powerful 
 than those of Saxton. 
 
 Wilde's Machine. 
 
 Things were in this state when, in 1866, Wilde made 
 an important addition to our knowledge of magneto- 
 electricity. 
 
 345. He conducted the current obtained by means of 
 Siemens's armature round an electro-magnet, and found 
 that the magnetism thus excited was far greater than 
 that of the entire series of steel magnets employed to 
 generate the magneto-electric current. 
 
 346. Thus, in one case, he found that whereas the 
 series of permanent magnets taken collectively was com- 
 petent to support a weight of 40 Ibs. only, the electro- 
 magnet which they excited sustained a weight of 1,088 Ibs. 
 
 347. To produce this effect, however, it was necessary 
 that the armature of the magneto-electric machine should 
 rotate with great rapidity. 
 
 348. But Wilde went farther. Forming his electro- 
 magnet from a large plate of iron, and placing between its 
 long poles a correspondingly long armature, similar in 
 shape and construction to that of the magneto-electric 
 machine, he obtained from this second armature currents 
 of enormously greater power than those obtainable from 
 the first. 
 
 349. These currents could in their turn be sent round a 
 second electro-magnet, formed from a larger plate of iron. 
 Furnished with a rotating armature, this second electro- 
 magnet produced effects previously unknown. Rods of 
 iron a quarter of an inch in thickness were fused by the 
 
SIEMENS'S AND WHEAT-STONE'S MACHINE. 193 
 
 currents, and they were also found competent, when dis- 
 charged between carbon terminals, to produce a light of 
 intolerable brilliancy. 
 
 Siemens'* s and Wheatstone^s Machine. 
 
 350. The next great step in magneto-electricity was 
 made simultaneously by Dr. Werner Siemens and Sir 
 Charles Wheatstone. 
 
 351. Expressed generally, this discovery consists in 
 exalting, by means of its own action, to a high pitch of 
 intensity an infinitesimal amount of magnetism. 
 
 352. Conceive an electro-magnetic core with a very 
 small amount of residual magnetism, which is never wholly 
 absent when iron has been once magnetized. Let a sec- 
 ondary coil, with cores of soft iron, rotate before the poles 
 of such a magnet. Exceedingly feeble induced currents 
 will circulate in the secondary coil. Let these induced 
 currents, instead of being carried away, be sent round the 
 electro-magnet which produced them ; its magnetism will 
 be thereby exalted. It is then in a condition to produce 
 still stronger currents. These also being sent round the 
 magnet, raise its magnetism still higher ; a more copious 
 production of induced currents being the consequence. 
 Thus by a series of interactions between the electro-magnet 
 and the secondary helix, each in turn exalting the other, 
 the electro-magnet is raised from a state of almost perfect 
 neutrality to one of intense magnetization. 
 
 353. When the magnet has been raised to this con- 
 dition, other coils than those employed to magnetize it 
 may be caused to rotate before, or between, its poles ; the 
 currents from these coils may be carried away and made 
 use of, for magnetization, for chemical decomposition, or 
 for the electric light. 
 
 354. The first magneto-electric machine used to pro- 
 
 9 
 
194 NOTES ON ELECTEICITY. 
 
 duce a light sufficiently intense for light-houses was con- 
 structed by Mr. Holmes. In it permanent steel magnets 
 and rotating helices were employed. Mr. Holmes has 
 lately constructed a very powerful machine on the prin- 
 ciple of Siemens and Wheatstone. 
 
 Induced Currents of the Ley den-Battery. 
 
 355. If a Ley den jar, or battery, be discharged through 
 a primary spiral, it evokes a current in a secondary spiral. 
 With a strong charge this secondary current may be caused 
 to deflagrate a foot of thin platinum wire. 
 
 356. If the current from the secondary spiral be led 
 round a third spiral which faces a fourth ; on discharging 
 the battery through the primary spiral, the secondary in 
 the third spiral acts the part of a primary, and evokes in 
 the fourth spiral a tertiary current. 
 
 357. With another pair of spirals this tertiary current 
 can he made to generate a current of the fourth order ; 
 this again, with another pair of spirals, a current of the 
 fifth order. All these currents can impart shocks, ignite 
 gunpowder, or deflagrate wires. 
 
 For the investigation of the Induced Currents of the 
 Leyden-Battery we are indebted to Prof. Joseph Henry, 
 Director of the Smithsonian Institution, and to Prof. Bless, 
 of Berlin. 
 
 THE END. 
 
 0? 
 
 trmiR 
 
WORKS OF HERBERT SPENCER, 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 E>. APPLETON AND COMPANY. 
 
 SYSTEM OF PHILOSOPHY 
 
 I. FIKST PRINCIPLES. 
 (New and Enlarged Edition.} 
 PART I. THE UNKNOWABLE. 
 PART II. LAWS OF THE KNOW ABLE. 
 
 659 pages. Price, . - - $2.53 
 
 II. THE PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY. VOL. I. 
 PART I. THE DATA OP BIOLOGY. 
 PART II. THE INDUCTIONS OF BIOLOGY. 
 PART III. THE EVOLUTION OF LIFE. 
 
 475 pages. Price, $2.60 
 
 PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY. YOL. II. 
 PART IV. MORPHOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT. 
 PART V. PHYSIOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT. 
 PART VI. LAWS OF MULTIPLICATION. 
 
 565 pages. Price, $2.50 
 
 III. THE PRINCIPLES OF PSYCHOLOGY. 
 
 PART I. THE DATA OF PSYCHOLOGY. 144 pages. Price, - - $0.75 
 PART II. THE INDUCTIONS OF PSYCHOLOGY. 146 pages. Price, - $0.75 
 PART III. GENERAL SYNTHESIS. 100 pages. ) - . 
 PART IV. SPECIAL SYNTHESIS. 112 pages. f Fnce > 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS. 
 
 I. ILLUSTRATIONS OF UNIVERSAL PROGRESS. 
 THIRTEEN ARTICLES. 451 pages. Price, ..... $2.50 
 
 II. ESSAYS : 
 
 MORAL, POLITICAL, AND ^ESTHETIC. 
 TEN ESSAYS. 386 pages. Price, $2.50 
 
 III. SOCIAL STATICS: 
 OR THE CONDITIONS ESSENTIAL TO HUMAN HAPPINESS SPECIFIED, AND THE 
 
 FIRST OF THEM DEVELOPED. 
 523 pages. Price, $2.50 
 
 IV. EDUCATION: 
 
 INTELLECTUAL, MORAL, AND PHYSICAL. 
 
 888 pages. Price, $1.25 
 
 V. CLASSIFICATION OF THE SCIENCES. 
 60 pages. Price, ... $0.25 
 
 VI. SPONTANEOUS GENERATION, &c. 
 16 pages, Price, . ... $0.25 
 
THE ORIGIN OF SPECIES, 
 
 By CHARLES DARWIN. 
 
 A new American edition of " The Origin of Species," later than the latest 
 English edition, has just been published, with the author's most recent cor- 
 rections and additions. 
 
 In the whole history of the progress of knowledge there is no case so re- 
 markable of a system of doctrines, at first generally condemned as false and 
 absurd, coming into general acceptance in the scientific world in a single 
 decade. From the following statements, the reader will infer the estimate 
 that is now placed upon the man and his works by the highest authorities. 
 
 "Personally and practically exercised in zoology, in minute anatomy, in 
 geology ; a student of geographical distribution, not on maps and in museums 
 only, but by long voyages and laborious collection ; having largely advanced 
 each of these branches of science, and having spent many years in gathering 
 and sifting materials for his present work, the store of accurately-registered 
 facts upon which the author of the ' Origin of Species ' is able to draw at 
 will is prodigious." Prof. T. H. HUXLEY. 
 
 "Far abler men than myself may confess that they have not that imtiring 
 patience in accumulating, and that wonderful skill in using, large masses of 
 facts of the most varied kind that wide and accurate physiological knowl- 
 edge that acuteness in devising, that skill in carrying out experiments, and 
 that admirable style of composition, at once clear, persuasive, and judicial, 
 qualities which, in their harmonious combination, mark out Mr. Darwin as 
 the man, perhaps of all men now living, best fitted for the great work he 
 has undertaken and accomplished." ALFRED RUSSELL WALLACE. 
 
 In Germany these views are rapidly extending. Prof. GIEKIE, a distin- 
 guished British geologist, attended the recent Congress of German Natural- 
 ists and Physicians, at Innspruck, in which some eight hundred savants 
 were present, and thus writes : 
 
 "What specially struck me was the universal sway which the writings 
 of Darwin now exercise over the German mind. You see it on every side, in 
 private conversation, in printed papers, in all the many sections into which 
 such a meeting as that at Innspruck divides. Darwin's name is often men- 
 tioned, and always with the profoundest veneration. But even where no al- 
 lusion is specially made to him, nay, even more markedly, where such allusion 
 is absent, we see how thoroughly his doctrines have permeated the scientific 
 mind, even in those departments of knowledge which might seem at first 
 sight to be farthest from natural history. * You are still discussing in Eng- 
 land,' said a German friend to me, * whether or not the theory of Darwin can 
 be true. We have got a long way beyond that here. His theory is now our 
 common starting-point.' And, so far as my experience went, I found it tc 
 be so." 
 
 33. ^IPIT^EITON & CO.. 
 
THE DESCENT OF MAN, 
 
 SELECTION IN RELATION TO SEX. 
 
 BY 
 
 CHAS. DARWIN, M, A., F. E, S. 
 
 Two Vols., 12mo. 
 
 PRICE, ..... $4.00 
 
 In these volumes Mr. Darwin has brought forward all the facts and 
 arguments which science has to offer in favor of the doctrine that man 
 has arisen by gradual development from the lowest point of animal life. 
 He had originally intended this work as a posthumous publication, but 
 the extensive acceptance of the views unfolded in his book on the " Origin 
 of Species " induced him to believe that the public were ripe for the most 
 advanced deductions from his theory of "Natural Selection." Aside from 
 the logical purpose which Mr. Darwin had in view, his work is an original 
 and fascinating contribution to the most interesting portion of natural 
 history. 
 
 From the London Spectator. 
 
 "For our part, we find Dr. Darwin's vindication of the origin of man a far more 
 wonderful vindication of Theism than Paley's ' Natural Theology,' though we do 
 not know, so reticent is his style, whether or not he conceives it himsell." 
 From the Citizen and Hound Table. 
 
 " Even the charge of atheism, which was so violently urged against Mr. Dar- 
 win, is now rarely heard, and theologians, whose orthodoxy is unquestioned, have 
 ventured to admit that it is possible to believe both in Christianity and the Dar- 
 winian theory at the same time." 
 
 From the Charleston Courier. 
 
 "No one can rise from an ordinarily attentive consideration of Mr. Darwin's 
 treatise, without being impressed, not only with the extent and depth of the 
 knowledge which he has attained upon the subject under treatment, and his long, 
 unwearied labor in collecting facts, but also with his possession of qualities 
 equally rare the true scientific temper, the transparent candor, and the truth- 
 seeking soberness, with which he expresses to you his conclusions, and the pro- 
 cesses by which he reaches them. 
 
 " Whether you like his discourse or not though you may refuse to acquiesce 
 in his conclusions still you are compelled to bear your witness, that this man 
 ^as not been laboring to find facts to support a preconceived theory, but that the 
 'heory is tlie irrepressible outgrowth of his accumulated facts.' 1 '' 
 From the Evening Bulletin. 
 
 " This theory is now indorsed by many eminent scientists, who at first com- 
 bated it, including Sir Charles Lyell, probably the most learned of living geolo- 
 gists, and even by a class of Christian divines like Dr. McCosh, who think that 
 certain theories of cosmogony, like the nebular hypothesis and the law of evolu- 
 tion, may be accepted without doing violence to faith." 
 
 , to any address in the U. S., on receipt of the price. 
 
 D. APPLETON & CO., Publishers. 
 
THE ORIGIN OP CIVILIZATION ; 
 
 OR, THE 
 
 PRIMITIVE CONDITION OF MAN. 
 By SIR JOHN LUBBOCK, Bart., M. P., F. R. S. 
 
 38O [Pages. Illustrated. 
 
 This interesting work is the fruit of many years' research 
 by an accomplished naturalist, and one well trained in mod- 
 ern scientific methods, into the mental, moral, and social con- 
 dition of the lowest savage races. The want of a work of 
 this kind had long been felt, and, as scientific methods are 
 being more and more applied to questions of humanity, there 
 has been increasing need of a careful and authentic work de- 
 scribing the conditions of those tribes of men who are lowest 
 in the scale of development. 
 
 " This interesting work for it is intensely so in its aim, scope, and the 
 ability of its author treats of what the scientists denominate anthropology, 
 or the natural history of the human species ; the complete science of man, 
 body and soul, including sex, temperament, race, civilization, etc." Provi- 
 dence Press. 
 
 " A work which is most comprehensive in its aim, and most admirable in 
 its execution. The patience and judgment bestowed on the book are every- 
 where apparent ; the mere list of authorities quoted giving evidence of wide 
 and impartial reading. The work, indeed, is not only a valuable one on ac- 
 count of the opinions it expresses, but it is also most serviceable as a book 
 of reference. It offers an able and exhaustive table of a vast array of facts, 
 which no single student could well obtain for himself, and it has not been 
 made the vehicle for any special pleading on the part of the author." 
 London Athenceum. 
 
 " The book is no cursory and superficial review ; it goes to the very heart 
 of the subject, and embodies the results of all the later investigations. It ia 
 replete with curious and quaint information presented in a compact, luminous, 
 and entertaining form." Albany Evening Journal. 
 
 " The treatment of the subject is eminently practical, dealing more with 
 fact than theory, or perhaps it will be more just to say, dealing only with 
 theory amply sustained by fact." Detroit Free Press. 
 
 " This interesting and valuable volume illustrates, to some extent, the 
 tray in which the modern scientific spirit manages to extract a considerable 
 treasure from the chaff and refuse neglected or thrown aside by former in 
 quirers." London Saturday Review. 
 
 D. APPLETON & CO.-, Publishers. 
 
D. Appleton & Company^ Publications. 
 
 LAY 
 
 ADDEESSES, AND KEYIEWS, 
 
 BY THOMAS HENRY HUXLEY. 
 Cloth, 12mo. 380 pages. Price, $1.75 
 
 THIS is the latest and most popular of the works of this -in- 
 trepid and accomplished English thinker. The American edition 
 of the work is the latest, and contains, in addition to the English 
 edition, Professor Huxley's recent masterly address on " Spon- 
 taneous Generation," delivered before the British Association for 
 the Advancement of Science, of which he was president. 
 
 The following is from an able article in the Independent : 
 
 The " Lay Sermons, Addresses, and Reviews " is a book to be read 
 by every one who would keep up with the advance of truth as well by 
 those who are hostile as those who are friendly to his conclusions. In 
 it, scientific and philosophical topics are handled with consummate abil- 
 ity. It is remarkable for purity of style and power of expression. No- 
 where, in any modern work, is the advancement of the pursuit of that 
 natural knowledge, which is of vital importance to bodily and mental 
 well-being, so ably handled. 
 
 Professor Huxley is undoubtedly the representative scientific man of 
 the age. His reverence for the right and devotion to truth have estab- 
 lished his leadership of modern scientific thought. He leads the beliefs 
 and aspirations of the increasingly powerful body of the younger men of 
 science. His ability for research is marvellous. 'There is possible no more 
 equipoise of judgment than that to which he brings the phenomena of 
 Nature. Besides, he is not a mere scientist. His is a popularized phi- 
 losophy ; social questions have been treated by his pen in a manner most 
 masterly. In his popular addresses, embracing the widest range of top- 
 ics, he treads on ground with which he seems thoroughly familiar. 
 
 There are those who hold the name of Professor Huxley as synony. 
 mous with irreverence and atheism. Plato's was so held, and Galileo's, 
 and Descartes's, and Newton's, and Faraday's. There can be no greater 
 mistake. No man has greater reverence for the Bible than Huxley. No 
 one more acquaintance with the text of Scripture. He believes there is 
 definite government of the universe ; that pleasures and pains are distrib- 
 uted in accordance with law ; and that the certain proportion of evil 
 woven up hi the life even of worms will help the man "who thinks to bear 
 his own share with courage. 
 
 In the estimate of Professor Huxley's future influence upon science, 
 his youth and health form a large element. He has just passed his forty- 
 fifth year. If God spare his life, truth can hardly fail to be the gainer 
 from a mind that is stored with knowledge of the laws of the Creator's 
 operations, and that has learned to love all beauty and hate ail vileness of 
 Nature and art. 
 
SPENCERS SYSTEM OF PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 THE PHILOSOPHY OF EVOLUTION, 
 
 By HERBERT SPENCER. 
 
 This great system of scientific thought, the most original and important men- 
 tal undertaking of the age, to which Mr. Spencer has devoted his life, is now well 
 advanced, the published volumes being: First Principles, The Principles of Bi- 
 ology, two volumes, and The Principles of Psychology , vol. i., which will be 
 shortly printed. 
 
 This philosophical system differs from all its predecessors in being solidly 
 based on the sciences of observation and induction ; in representing the order 
 and course of Nature ; in bringing Nature and man, life, mind, and society, under 
 one great law of action ; and in developing a method of thought which may serve 
 for practical guidance in dealing with the affairs of life. That Mr. Spencer is the 
 man for this great work will be evident from the following statements : 
 
 " The only complete and systematic statement of the doctrine of Evolution 
 with which I am acquainted is that contained in Mr. Herbert Spencer's ' System 
 of Philosophy ; ' a work which should be carefully studied by all who desire to 
 know whither scientific thought is tending." T. H. HUXLEY. 
 
 " Of all our thinkers, he is the one who has formed to himself the largest new 
 scheme of a systematic philosophy." Prof. MASSON. 
 
 " If any individual influence is visibly encroaching on Mills in this country, it 
 is his." ma. 
 
 "Mr. Spencer is one of the most vigorous as well as boldest thinkers that 
 English speculation has yet produced." JOHN SXUAKT MILL. 
 
 " One of the acutest metaphysicians of modern times." Ibid. 
 
 " One of our deepest thinkers." Dr. JOSEPH D. HOOKEB. 
 
 It is questionable if any thinker of finer calibre has appearc/l in our coun- 
 try." GEORGE HENRY LEWES. 
 
 "He alone, of all British thinkers, has organized a philosophy." Ibid. 
 
 " He is as keen an analyst as is known in the history of philo&ophy ; I do not 
 except either Aristotle or Kant." GEORGE EIPLET. 
 
 "If we were to give our own judgment, we should say that, since Newton, 
 there has not in England been a philosopher of more remarkable speculative and 
 ystematizing talent than (in spite of some errors and some narrowness) Mr. Her- 
 bert Spencer." London Saturday Review. 
 
 u We cannot refrain from offering our tribute of respect to one who, whether 
 lor Ihe extent of his positive knowledge, or for the profundity of his speculative 
 insight, has already achieved a name second to none in the whole range of Eng- 
 lish philosophy, and whose works will worthily sustain the credit of Englisb 
 thought in the present generation." Westminster Review. 
 
Woi Jcs of Herbert /Spencer published by D. Appleton & Co. 
 A NEW SYSTEM OF PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 FIRST PRINCIPLES. 
 
 . Vol.: Large 12mo. 515 Pages. Price $2 50. 
 
 CONTENTS : 
 PART FIRST. TJie Unknowable. 
 
 flaptei ju Religion and Science; II. Ultimate Ecligious Ideas; 111 
 Ultimate Scientific Ideas; IV. The Relativity of all Knowledge; V Thi 
 Reconciliation. 
 
 PART SECOND, Laws of the Knowable. 
 
 I. Laws in General; II. The Law of Evolution; III. The same con- 
 tinued; IY. The Causes of Evolution; V. Space, Time, Matter, Motion, and 
 Force ; VL The Indestructibility of Matter ; VII. The Continuity of Motion ; 
 VIE. The Persistence of Force ; IX. The Correlation and Equivalence of 
 Forces; X. The Direction of Motion ; XI. The Rhythm of Motion; XII. The 
 Conditions Essential to Evolution ; XIII. The Instability of the Homoge- 
 neous ; XIV. The Multiplication of Effects ; XV. Differentiation *nd Inte- 
 gration ; XVI. Equilibration ; XVII. Summary and Conclusion. 
 
 In the first part of this work Mr. Spencer defines the province, limits, and 
 relations of religion and science, and determines the legitimate scope of 
 philosophy. 
 
 In part second he unfolds those fundamental principles which have been 
 arrived at within the sphere of the knowable ; which are true of all order* 
 of phenonema, and thus constitute the foundation of all philosophy. The 
 law of Evolution, Mr. Spencer maintains to be universal, and he has here 
 worked it out as the basis of his system. 
 
 These First Principles are the foundation of a system of Philosophy 
 bolder, more elaborate, and comprehensive perhaps, than any other which 
 oat been hitherto designed hi England. British Quarterly Review. 
 
 A work lofty hi aim and remarkable in execution, CornJdll Magazine. 
 
 In the works of Herbert Spencer we have the rudiments of a positrra 
 Theology, and an immense step toward the perfection of the science of Psy- 
 chology. Christian Examiner. 
 
 If we mistake not, in spite of the very negative character of his own re 
 Bolts, he has foreshadowed some strong arguments for tke doctrine of a poei- 
 felre Christian Theology. New Englander. 
 
 .As far as tke frontiers of knowledge, where the intellect may go, there ft 
 so living man whose guidance may more safely be trusted. 
 Sfwt&lv. 
 
D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS. 
 THE 
 
 Correlation and Conservation of Forces. 
 
 WITH AN 
 
 HTKODUCTION AND BEIEF BIOGE APHICAL NOTICES 
 By EDWARD L. YOUMANS, M.D. 12mo, 490 pages. 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 L By W. R. GROYE. The Correlation of Physical Forces. 
 H. By Prof. HELMHOLTZ. The Interaction of Natural Forces. 
 HI. By J. R. MAYER. 1. Remarks on the Forces of Inorganic Nature. 
 
 2. On Celestial Dynamics. 
 
 3. On the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat. 
 
 IV. By Dr. FARADAY. Some Thoughts on the Conservation of Forces. 
 Y. By Prof. LIEBIG. The Connection and Equivalence of Forces. 
 VI. By Dr. CARPENTER. The Correlation of the Physical and Vital Forces. 
 
 "This work is a very welcome addition to our scientific literature, and will b 
 particularly acceptable to those who wish to obtain a popular, but at the same time 
 precise and clear view of what Faraday justly calls the highest law in physical scienca, 
 the principle of the conservation of force. Sufficient attention has not been paid to the 
 publication of collected monographs or memoirs upon special subjects. Dr. Youmans' 
 work exhibits the value of such collections in a very striking manne^, and we earnestly 
 hope his excellent example may be followed in other branches of science." American 
 Journal of Science. 
 
 "It was a happy thought which suggested the publication of this volume. The 
 question is often asked, and not so easily answered, What are the new doctrines of the 
 Correlation and Conservation of Forces? In this volume we have the answer, and 
 with the reasons of its chief expounders ; those who are ignorant on that thcine, can 
 thus question the original authorities. 1 ' New Englander. 
 
 "We here have the original expositions of the new Philosophy of Forces, accompa- 
 nied by an excellent exposition of both the expositions and the expositors; the wholo 
 will be a rare treat to the lovers of advancing scientific thought." Methodist 
 Quarterly Review. 
 
 " This is, perhaps, the most remarkable book of the age. We have hero the latent 
 discoveries, and the highest results of thought concerning the nature, laws, and con- 
 aections of the forces of the universe. No higher or more sublime problem can engage 
 the intellect of man than is discussed by these doctors of science intent alone on aniv 
 tag at the truth." Detroit Free Press. 
 
 'This work presents a praiseworthy specimen of complete and faithful authorship, 
 Bad it* publication at thie time will form an epoch in tha experience of army think ing 
 mlnda." ibune. 
 
Works of Herbert Spencer published by D. Appleton & Co. 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS OF UNIVERSAL PROGRESS, 
 
 A SERIES OF DISCUSSIONS. 
 
 1 Vol Large 12mo. 470 Paflrea. Price $2.50. 
 
 . ' CONTENTS : 
 
 American Notice of Spencer's New System of Philosophy. 
 I. Progress : its Law and Cause. 
 II, Manners and Fashion. 
 
 III. The Genesis of Science. 
 
 IV, The Physiology of Laughter. 
 
 V. The Origin and Function of Music. 
 
 VI. The Nebular Hypothesis. 
 
 VII. Bain on the Emotions and the Will. 
 
 VIII. Illogical Geology. 
 
 IX. The Development Hypothesis. 
 
 X. The Social Organism. 
 
 XI. Use and Beauty. 
 
 XH. The Sources of Architectural Types. 
 
 XIII. The Dse of Anthropomorphism. 
 
 These Essays constitute a body of massive and original thought upon a 
 farge variety of important topics, and will be read with pleasure by all who 
 appreciate a bold and powerful treatment of fundamental themes. The 
 general thought which pervades this book is beyond doubt the most impor- 
 tant that the human mind has yet reached. N. Y. Independent. 
 
 Those who have read the work on Education, will remember the ana- 
 lytic tendency of the author's mind his clear perception and admirable ex- 
 position of first principles his wide grasp of facts his lucid and vigorous 
 style, and the constant and controlling bearing of the discussion on practical 
 results. These traits characterize all Mr. Spencer's -writings, and mark, in 
 an eminent degree, the present volume. N. Y. Tribune. 
 
 We regard the distinguishing feature of this work to be the peculiarly 
 Interesting character of its matter to the general reader. This is a great 
 literary as well as philosophic triumph. In the evolution of a system of 
 Philosophy which demands serious attention, and a keen exercise of the in- 
 tellect to fathom and appreciate, he has mingled much that is really popular 
 *nd entertaining. Rochester Democrat. 
 
Works pubUsJted ly 2). Appleton <& Co. 
 
 HEAT, 
 
 CONSIDERED AS A MODE OF MOTION, 
 
 Being a Course of Twelve Lectures delivered before th* 
 Royal Institution of Great Britain. 
 
 BY JOHN TYITDALL, F. E. S., 
 
 FSOFKSSOB or NATUBAL PHILOSOPHY IN THE BOYAL INSTITTTTION AUTHOX 3* t 
 "GLACIEES OF THE ALTS," ETC. 
 
 "With One Hundred Illustrations. Svo, 480 pages. Price, $2. 
 
 From tne American Journal of Science. With all the skill which has 
 made Faraday the master of experimental science in Great Britain, Professor Tyndall 
 enjoys the advantage of a superior general culture, and is thus enabled to set forth his 
 philosophy with all the graces of eloquence and the finish of superior diction. "With a 
 simplicity, and absence of technicalities, which render his explanations lucid to un- 
 scientific minds, and at the same time a thoroughness and originality by which he in- 
 structs the most learned, he unfolds all the modern philosophy of heat His work takes 
 rank at once as a classic upon the subject. 
 
 New York Times. Professor Tyndall's course of lectures on heat is one of the 
 most beautiful illustrations of a mode of handling scientific subjects, which is com- 
 paratively new, and which promises the best results, both to science and to literature 
 generally ; we mean the treatment of subjects in a style at once profound and popu- 
 lar. The title of Professor Tyndall's work indicates the theory of heat held by him, 
 and indeed the only one now held by scientific men it is a mode of motion. 
 
 Boston Journal. He exhibits the curious and beautiful workings of nature in 
 A most delightful manner. Before the reader particles of water lock themselves or fly 
 asunder with a movement regulated like a dance. They form themselves into liquid 
 flowers with fine serrated petals, or into rosettes of frozen gauze ; they bound upward 
 In boiling fountains, or creep slowly onward in stupendous glaciers. Flames burst into 
 music and sing, or cease to sing, as the experimenter pleases, and metals paint them- 
 selves upon a screen in dazzling hues as the painter touches his canvas. 
 
 New York Tribune. The most original and important contribution that ha> 
 yet been made to tho theory and literature of thermotics. 
 
 Scientific American. The work is written in a charming style, and Is th 
 most valuable contribution to scientific literature that has been published in many 
 fears. It is the most popular exposition of the dynamical theory of heat that, haa yet 
 appeared. The old material theory of heat may be said to be defunct. 
 
 Louisville Democrat. This is one of the most delightful scientific works w 
 htye ever met. The lectures are so full of life and spirit that we can almost imagine 
 the lecturer before us, and see his brilliant experiments in every stage of their progress. 
 The theory is so carefully and thoroughly explained that no one can fail to understand 
 it. Such books as these create a love for science. 
 
 Independent. Professor Tyndall's expositions and experiments are remarkably 
 thoughtful, ingenious, clear, and convincing ; portions of the book have almost tb 
 interest of a romance, so startling are the descriptions and elucidations. 
 
UNIVERSITY OP CALIFORN IA LiBRARY 
 
 THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 
 30w-l,'15 
 
YB 09622 
 
 / 
 / 
 
 i